Trip Description
Overview
Type:
Days:
Distance:
Difficulty:
Origin:
Price:
Single Supplement:
Itinerary
Day 1
Meet your guide at the Best Western Abbey Inn for a brief orientation at 6am. Depart St. George for the 2 hour drive to Bryce Canyon National Park. Today we explore along and beneath the rim of Bryce Canyon. We embark on a great hike that offers all that Bryce is famous for: unique rock towers (hoodoos), natural arches and windows and spectacular views. And it’s also less crowded than some of the other trails in the park. You’ll enjoy the fascinating features like the Chinese Wall, Boat Mesa and Tower Bridge. There are many ups and downs along the way making this a moderately strenuous hike but the rewards are plentiful! After our hike, we will head to our lodge in the town of Escalante for some hot showers before heading out for dinner at one of the nearby restaurants.
Drive Time: 2 hours to Bryce, 1 hour to Escalante
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2300 feet of elevation change
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today we are off for a full day of exploring the secrets of the Escalante River Canyon. This beautiful redrock canyon holds endless hidden treasures. This lush oasis provides a stark contrast to the surrounding desert wilderness. Highlights include Maverick Natural Bridge, Escalante Natural Bridge and ancient rock art. Be sure to bring your water sandals for the numerous stream crossings. After a full day of exploring, we’ll head back to our lodge to rest and clean up before dinner.
Drive Time: 45 minutes
Distance & Elevation: ~8 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today is all about waterfalls! Calf Creek is a gorgeous canyon with lush vegetation, cool, clear water and the idyllic Lower Calf Creek Falls. Enjoy a dip in the creek while your guide prepares a hearty lunch beneath the shady cottonwoods. If time allows in the afternoon, there is an opportunity to visit Upper Calf Creek Falls, an equally breathtaking oasis.
Drive Time: less than 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: 6-8 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Slot Canyons!!! Perhaps you’ve seen them in pictures but to walk through these spectacular, narrow canyons is an experience you won’t soon forget. Beautifully carved by endless centuries of rushing water, these sandstone canyons are a photographers dream. You’ve got to see it to believe it! A visit to Devil’s Garden with its unique rock formations will round out another fabulous day in Canyon Country.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
On our final day, we will pack up and head back towards St. George. We will travel into a hidden garden of slickrock and hoodoos, outstanding natural features creating a maze of sandstone formations awaiting your contemplation. Stunning views and quiet trails are the flavor of the day in this seldom-visited jewel of Canyon Country. Your guide will choose one of many great hikes to suit the desires of the group. After lunch, we will finish up the drive back to St. George for farewells.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 3 to 5 miles, 500 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
4-Day Option
For those looking for a shorter trip, our 4-day itinerary skips the hike in Bryce Canyon on Day 1 and instead heads straight to Escalante.
Day 1
The Grand Canyon Rim to Rim tour departs Flagstaff early for a beautiful drive through the Navajo Reservation & Painted Desert, across the Colorado River and along the Vermilion Cliffs and Kaibab Plateau to our starting point 8000 feet above sea level. We descend the spectacular North Kaibab Trail to Cottonwood Campground. Enjoy stunning canyon scenery as you traverse along towering cliffs and dramatic gorges, past Roaring Springs and Bright Angel Creek. The evening skies are magical as the sunset colors fade to night and an unimaginable number of stars take their place.
Drive Time: 3.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 4160 foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We rise with the sun, enjoy a tasty breakfast and head back out on the trail. Tonight’s home will be Bright Angel Campground, a short stroll from Phantom Ranch and the Colorado River. But along the way we’ll stop to admire the remarkable Ribbon Falls, tucked away in a beautiful little alcove off the main trail. Continuing on, the wide open views we’ve been enjoying give way to the sinuous narrows of The Box. This fabulous stretch of trail follows the creek closely as the black cliffs of the Vishnu Schist rise immediately beside us, a thousand feet overhead, eventually opening up as we approach camp. Enjoy a cold lemonade or frosty beer in the late afternoon at the Ranch followed by a delicious dinner prepared by your guide.
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 1600 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After breakfast we will begin our trek up to Havasupai Gardens with side hiking options and some beautiful pools to cool off in. Enjoy stunning views along the Colorado River before heading up Pipe Creek and the famous Bright Angel Trail. Late in the afternoon, enjoy a leisurely 1.5 mile hike out to Plateau Point, the finest place in Grand Canyon to watch the sunset.
Distance & Elevation: 4.5 miles, 1500 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After packing up camp we begin our final ascent, over 4 miles and 3000-foot to the South Rim. The ever-evolving view will assure you stop regularly to take photos and catch your breath. This is also your best chance to catch a glimpse of the endangered California Condors soaring overhead. We’ll a big, tasty lunch on the rim before the shuttle drive back to Flagstaff.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 4.6 miles, 3000 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for the drive to the South Rim of the Grand Canyon and the South Kaibab Trailhead. After final preparations, we will begin our trek down into the Canyon, stopping regularly for breaks, snacks and photo opportunities. Upon reaching the Colorado River, we cross the impressive Black Bridge just a few minutes from our home for the night at Bright Angel Campground. Relax by the creek while your guide sets up camp and prepares a delicious dinner. You will also have a chance to visit Phantom Ranch and take in a ranger-led program while the night sky fills with an unimaginable number of stars.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 4800 foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After breakfast we will begin our hike up to Cottonwood Campground. Highlights of today’s walk include The Box, a narrow section of winding canyon along the banks of Bright Angel Creek, and Ribbon Falls, a spectacular waterfall tucked away in an idyllic grotto just off the main trail. As you near Cottonwood Camp, the massive cliffs of the North Rim tower overhead. Tonight’s camp is the ideal place to stargaze, with lots of open sky to catch shooting stars and passing satellites.
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 1600 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After a few hot cups of coffee and a hearty breakfast, we will strike out on a mission towards the North Rim. Traveling with just our day packs and essentials, we will make our way up the trail, past Roaring Springs and through the seemingly endless layers of colorful rocks laid down over millennia. The towering cliffs are nothing short of spectacular and the wilderness solitude is a rare treat. After a delicious lunch, we will head back down to camp for some well-deserved rest & relaxation. *A summit of the North Rim is not a guarantee, nor is it a primary the goal of this trip. We cannot guarantee that weather conditions or the ability of all participants will facilitate such a goal.
Distance & Elevation: 8 to 14 miles, 2000 to 4500 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Today we’ll pack up and head back to Bright Angel Campground, enjoying lunch at Phantom Ranch. Spend the afternoon relaxing…you’ve been working hard!
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 1600 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
We’ll be up early again to have breakfast, breakdown camp and pack up for the final leg of the journey. But today we’ll lighten our loads by packing out tents, sleeping bags and a few other items on the mules. We head up the famous Bright Angel Trail, featuring a stunning stretch along the Colorado River, the Granite Narrows of Pipe Creek and nice rest at Havasupai Gardens. We’ll top out in the early to midafternoon and celebrate a great accomplishment before heading back to Flagstaff.
Distance & Elevation: 9.5 miles, 4400 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Day 1
This Grand Canyon hiking tour starts early with an enjoyable drive to the South Rim of the Grand Canyon and the South Kaibab Trailhead. After final preparations, we will begin our trek down into the Canyon, stopping regularly for breaks, snacks and photo opportunities. Upon reaching the Colorado River, we cross the impressive Black Bridge just a few minutes from our home for the night at Bright Angel Campground. Relax by the creek while your guide sets up camp and prepares a delicious dinner. You will also have a chance to visit Phantom Ranch and take in a ranger-led program while the night sky fills with an unimaginable number of stars.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 4800 foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today’s adventure starts with a breathtaking walk along the Colorado River, offering unparalleled views of the Inner Gorge and the surrounding buttes. The Bright Angel Trail will lead us onward and upward along Pipe and Garden Creeks, through the Devil’s Corkscrew and on to Havasupai Gardens, a beautiful, shaded oasis and our second campsite. After some rest and relaxation, we will take an enjoyable stroll out to Plateau Point to take in one of the greatest views Grand Canyon has to offer. Bring your camera…the sunsets here will leave you speechless!
Distance & Elevation: 4.5 miles, 1500 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After packing up camp we begin our final ascent, to the South Rim. This stretch of trail offers some of the best chances to see the endangered California Condor, the largest bird in North America (10ft wingspan). A big, tasty lunch and some time on the rim will allow you to celebrate your accomplishment before the drive back to Flagstaff.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 4.6 miles, 3000 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
4-Day Option
This will include a layover day at Bright Angel Campground. This option allows a full day for day hike exploration of areas such as The Box, Clear Creek Trail, or perhaps Ribbon Falls. Or just spend some time relaxing in one of the most beautiful places in the world!
Day 1
This beginner’s Grand Canyon hiking tour begins at the South Rim of the Grand Canyon and the Bright Angel Trailhead. The trail descends along an ancient Native American route following the Bright Angel Fault Line down to Havasupai Gardens Campground, our home for the next 2 nights. Upon reaching camp, feel free to relax by the nearby creek while your guide sets up and prepares a delicious lunch. In the late afternoon, the group will take the enjoyable 3 mile roundtrip stroll out to Plateau Point for some of the finest views Grand Canyon has to offer. Don’t forget your camera…sunsets out here will leave you breathless!
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 4.5 miles, 3000 foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Enjoy a hearty breakfast before heading out for a fantastic day hike to the bottom of the Canyon at Pipe Creek Beach, on the banks of the mighty Colorado River. You will hike through beautiful sandstone narrows, past tempting pools and be treated to memorable views as you head further into the Canyon’s depths. If time and energy allow, we can traverse along the River Trail for a mile or so, enjoying the memorable views up and down the Colorado River. After soaking it all in, we will make our way back to camp for another delicious dinner and some evening star-gazing.
*Due to a temporary trail closure from October 21, 2024 through May 14, 2025, this day will be spent traversing the Tonto Trail East through stunning Pipe Creek Canyon to its junction with the South Kaibab Trail at The Tipoff. Epic views unfold all day as we explore this seldom-traveled section of the inner canyon.
Distance & Elevation: 7-10 miles day hiking, 1400 foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After breakfast and packing up camp, we will retrace our steps back to the South Rim. As you make your way, pause to look back over the terrain you’ve just explored and reflect on your experience. Keep an eye out for the endangered California Condor, the largest bird in North America. They frequent this part of the canyon. A big, tasty lunch and some time on the rim will allow you to celebrate your accomplishment before the drive back to Flagstaff.
Distance & Elevation: 4.5 miles, 3000 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Day 1
This epic Grand Canyon hiking tour starts with a drive to remote Monument Point along the Grand Canyon’s North Rim. After final preparations, we will begin our trek down the Bill Hall Trail. The steep upper sections of the trail will demand your attention and a few “packs-off” scrambles will add to the adventure. After an initial descent of about 1500 feet, the trail will level out as we begin our traverse along the Esplanade, a broad slickrock bench studded with mushroom-shaped rocks, juniper trees and amazing cryptobiotic soil crusts. This “other-worldly” landscape will delight and inspire your inner photographer! Eventually we will arrive at our camp overlooking Surprise Valley and the Colorado River, still a few thousand feet below. Kick back and relax while your guide sets up camp and prepares a delicious dinner.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 2000 foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today’s destination is the watery oasis of Deer Creek Canyon. The rugged descent through the Redwall Limestone follows an ancient landslide to Surprise Valley. From here, the trail heads west and makes another challenging descent into Deer Creek Canyon. The “Throne Room” next to Deer Spring is a delightful, shady grotto to relax in and enjoy lunch. Shortly after, we will make camp along the banks of Deer Creek, leave our backpacks behind and take a stroll through the Deer Creek Narrows, a stunning stretch of sandstone canyon, deeply incised by the creek. Then it’s down to Colorado River and the 200 foot Deer Creek Falls. Enjoy a dip in the creek before heading back to camp.
Distance & Elevation: 5 miles + day hike, 3000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today’s journey will follow a faint trail high above the Colorado River towards Tapeats Creek. The views along this stretch are unbelievable and you will feel as though you have the entire Grand Canyon to yourself. Upon reaching the mouth of Tapeats Creek, we will turn upstream for the last few miles to camp. The unique geology and colorful rock layers of this beautiful canyon make for a wonderful conclusion to this great day of hiking.
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 1000 foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Onward and upward! Day 4 will lead us past the famous Thunder River, a huge, freshwater spring gushing directly out of the canyon wall. We will stop to rest and enjoy this wonderful spot before loading up on water for the hike across Surprise Valley and the steep climb back up to the Esplanade. Tonight’s camp will be somewhere along this slickrock wonderland, leaving a short hike back to the North Rim on our last day. Enjoy some well-deserved rest and relaxation. The sunsets here are breathtaking, as are the starry night skies. Take it all in as your guide prepares a final feast complete with unforgettable views.
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 3000 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
Another hearty breakfast and a beautiful sunrise will start our fifth and final day. Your guide will pack up camp before our final climb to the rim. Frequent rests will afford plenty of opportunities to gaze back upon this remarkable landscape. We’ll enjoy a delicious lunch back on the rim before loading up for the drive back to Flagstaff.
Distance & Elevation: 4 to 6 miles, 2000 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 4 hours
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for the drive to the South Rim of the Grand Canyon and the Bright Angel Trailhead. After final preparations, we will begin our trek down into the Canyon, stopping regularly for breaks, snacks and photo opportunities. A stop at famous Havasupai Gardens for lunch offers a well-earned break from downhill hiking. We then turn west on the quiet Tonto Trail and enjoy more level terrain for the last few miles into camp along Horn Creek. Relax as while your guide sets up camp and prepares a delicious dinner.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 7.3 miles, 3000 foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After a tasty breakfast, your guide will pack up camp and lead the group along the Tonto Trail to Monument Creek. You’ll pass through Salt Creek Canyon along the way and be treated to epic views of the Colorado River, Granite Rapids and The Abyss. This day features relatively level walking punctuated but short, steep ups and downs as you pass through each tributary canyon. Monument Creek is a welcoming home for your second night below the rim.
Distance & Elevation: 8.2 miles, minor decents & ascents
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Continuing west along the Tonto Trail, you’ll enjoy another day of beautiful vistas and peace and quiet. The sculpted buttes of the North Rim and the towering canyon walls are highlights of this wonderful stretch of trail. Your camp at Hermit Creek offers a lovely stream flowing through a gorgeous stretch of sandstone narrows. It’s only 3.5 miles from Monument Creek so you’ll have the whole afternoon to explore the lower canyon and perhaps visit the Colorado River at Hermit Rapids. Your guide will prepare a final evening feast before your last night’s rest beneath the starry skies.
Distance & Elevation: 3.5 miles + 3 miles day hiking, minor decent & ascents
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After packing up camp we begin our final ascent to the South Rim. The Hermit Trail climbs 3800 feet across 7.8 miles and is an exercise in patience and determination. We will get a sunrise start, take our time, and enjoy the stunning views as we climb the Cathedral Stairs, pick our way through a lengthy Supai traverse, and pass through peaceful Waldron Basin before the final climb to Hermits Rest. Expect to arrive back in Flagstaff by 5pm.
Distance & Elevation: 7.8 miles, 3800 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
*5-Day Option
This 5-Day itinerary involves a layover day at Monument Creek on Day 3, before continuing on to Hermit Creek. This day will involve a relaxing morning followed by a 4-mile roundtrip day hike down Monument Creek to the Colorado River. The afternoon can spent relaxing at camp, enjoying the beautiful pools along Monument Creek, or exploring the upper reaches of Monument Creek with your guide.
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for an enjoyable drive to the South Rim and the Grandview Trailhead. We will hike 3 miles down to Horseshoe Mesa where we will eat our lunch and enjoy a well-earned break. We will then continue down to Cottonwood Creek on the west side of Horseshoe Mesa. This is where we will spend our first night below the rim. Cottonwood Creek provides a refreshing place to rest up. The creek polishes beautiful slickrock into narrows downstream and offers excellent afternoon exploration. This area was also home to ancient life; as you scan the cliffs with your eyes, see if you can spot the ancient granaries.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 4.5 miles, 3500-foot descent
Light Breakfast,Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After breakfast, prepare for a full day of exploration. We will pack up camp and travel on the Tonto Trail around Horseshoe Mesa. The hike will include unbelievable vistas into the vast Grand Canyon and glances into the depths of the inner gorge. Drop below the Tonto plateau and find camp along Hance Creek. Settle in the shade of Cottonwood trees and soak your feet in the cool water or do a little exploring along the creek. As the sun goes down, enjoy the changing colors on the cliffs that surround you and watch as the stars slowly appear in the night sky.
Distance & Elevation: 4.4 miles, 200-foot ascent / 300-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today is a layover day at Hance Creek but don’t plan on relaxing. We will attempt to hike to the Colorado River and back via the eastern-most section of the Tonto Trail. It’s a long hike, clocking in at 13 miles roundtrip, but the elevation gain and loss are moderate. We’ll just be carrying daypacks and traveling light as we wind our way in and out of the beautiful red shales of Mineral Canyon before descending a boulder-strewn slope to Hance Rapid at the mouth of Red Canyon. We’ll enjoy a well-earned lunch by the river before heading back to our camp for the night.
Distance & Elevation: 13 miles, 1100-foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After a beautiful sunrise and leisurely breakfast, we will pack up camp and begin our ascent out of the canyon. We start with a 2-mile hike up to Horseshoe Mesa via a rugged route on its east side. From the mesa, it’s back up the 3-mile Grandview Trail that we descended on Day 1. The steep climb demands regular breaks to catch our breath, as well as take in the remarkable scenery. The views back towards Coronado Butte and the Sinking Ship, and the meandering Colorado River will be etched in your memory forever. Upon arrival back at Grandview Point, we will celebrate our accomplishment with a delicious lunch overlooking the canyon. The drive back to Flagstaff should have us arriving by approximately 4pm.
Distance & Elevation: 4.9 miles, 3700-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
3-Day Itinerary
Our 3-day itinerary is designed for those looking for a shorter trip that still offers some challenging hiking in a quiter section of Grand Canyon. The itinerary is the same as above except we skip the layover day at Hance Creek and won’t hike to the Colorado River.
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for the drive to the north side of the Grand Canyon and our remote trailhead at Jumpup Cabin. After final preparations, we will begin our trek into upper Jumpup Canyon. The descent is very gradual as we follow the dry creekbed. After about 4 miles, we leave the creekbed and strike out across the Esplanade, a sandstone bench of slickrock offering pleasant hiking and excellent views. As we approach the rim of Sowats Canyon, our route descends quickly to another dry creekbed which leads a final mile to camp near beautiful Mountain Sheep Spring, a watery oasis deep in our canyon wilderness. Relax while your guide sets up camp and prepares a delicious dinner.
Drive Time: ~4 hours
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 1730-foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After a tasty breakfast, we’ll leave camp setup and head out for a full day of exploring with just small day packs. Our route takes us down Sowats Creek to its junction with lower Jumpup Canyon, which we’ll follow downstream to the spectacular Jumpup Canyon Narrows, a deep and narrow limestone gorge with polished walls rising hundreds of feet overhead. After some time in the Narrows, we backtrack slightly to Kwagunt Hollow, another scenic canyon which we’ll ascend to the Esplanade, stopping for lunch along the way. It’s a fun but arduous scramble up Kwagunt Hollow but there are lost of little pools and waterfalls to enjoy along the way. Once back on the Esplanade, we will follow another trail that eventually drops us back into Sowats Canyon and home to our camp.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 9 miles, 1100-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Before breaking camp, we’ll enjoy a morning hike to explore a nearby section of canyon featuring stunning red cliffs and idyllic pools along a small creek. We then return to camp, pack up, and begin our journey back towards our trailhead. Our goal for tonight’s camp is the dry bed of Upper Jumpup Canyon, not far from a natural spring. We’ll backpack for about 4 miles before making camp for our final night in the backcountry.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 4 miles + 3 miles of day hiking, 400-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After packing up camp we begin our final trek back to the trailhead at Jumpup Cabin. It’s a gentle 4 miles of trail that we hiked on Day 1 but the early morning light offers a fresh perspective. Before the final push to the trailhead, we’ll stop to examine some ancient pictographs near a hidden spring. Upon reaching the vehicle, we’ll celebrate our experience with a big, tasty lunch before hitting the road for the journey home. Expect to arrive back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 4 miles, 1400-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: ~4 hours
Trip Itinerary
Specific itineraries vary for these trips and are based on a number of factors including group interests and fitness, desired hike length (number of days), time of year and permit availability. Contact one of our trip specialists to discuss custom options for your group. You can also join existing trips as space allows.
For custom itineraries, we recommend booking at least 5 to 6 months in advance. However, we can often find excellent itineraries for your group on shorter notice, as well. Most custom itineraries require a minimum of 4 participants, particularly during the months on March through June, as well as September and October.
However, here are a few itineraries that might be of interest:
Escalante Route: Tanner to New Hance (5 Days, Advanced+)
New Hance Loop (4 or 5 Days, Advanced)
Horseshoe Mesa (2 or 3 Days, Intermediate)
Call 1-928-525-1552 to speak with a trip specialist about planning your Custom Grand Canyon Backpacking Adventure today!
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for your scenic drive to the South Rim. We kick things off with a hike on one of the South Rim’s best trails. The South Kaibab Trail follows a ridgeline into the canyon, offering stunning views of the Inner Gorge, North Rim, and distant plateaus, making this an excellent beginning to your Grand Canyon exploration. After a picnic lunch along the trail, we return to the rim and begin making our way east to Desert View for its spectacular and unique views of the canyon and the distant Painted Desert. We then exit the park and drive through the Painted Desert to our cozy lodge in Marble Canyon. After some well-deserved showers, we will head out for a delicious dinner at one of the nearby restaurants.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours to South Rim, then 1.5 hours to Marble Canyon
Distance & Elevation:~6 miles, 1500-foot descent/ascent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After an early breakfast we are off for a full day of exploring. We will take a quick drive to the trailhead for our first hike into an exciting narrow canyon that leads to the banks of the Colorado River in Marble Canyon. This fun hike involves a bit of scrambling over boulders and along rock ledges as it meanders through towering limestone cliffs on its way to the river. After some exploring, it’s back to the car for the beautiful drive up to the North Rim. Upon arrival, we will visit Bright Angel Point, an incredible viewpoint perched along a narrow ridge offering wonderful canyon panoramas. A quick visit to the North Rim Lodge is followed by a peaceful stroll along the rim back to our comfy campsite in the pine forest. Your guide will set everything up while you kick back and soak in the beautiful surroundings. Enjoy a tasty dinner by the campfire.
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 350-foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we head out for a gorgeous hike through the North Rim’s ancient forests of firs, pines, and aspens. The Widforss Trail features terrific views, lots of fossils, relatively level hiking, and pleasant solitude. The trail contours the rim of Transept Canyon, a deep and stunning tributary canyon, whose floor is nearly 4000 feet below. Upon arrival at spectactular Widforss Point, we will enjoy a picnic lunch and savor the views before making our way back. Enjoy some free time around camp before dinner.
Drive Time: 10 minutes
Distance & Elevation: 10 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
An early start will allow enough time for your guide to pack up camp before heading out for one last scenic hike before the return trip to Flagstaff. Two great options present themselves: a hike below the Rim on the North Kaibab Trail to the stunning Coconino Overlook or Cape Final to a quiet and unique viewpoint offering views across the Painted Desert and Marble Plateau, and all the way to Navajo Mountain in southern Utah. We will explore through lunchtime before beginning our journey home. Expect to arrive back in Flagstaff around 5pm.
Distance & Elevation: 3 to 5 miles, up to 800-foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 3.5 hours
Day 1
We will meet at the South Rim the morning of our hike and make our way to the South Kaibab Trailhead. After final preparations, we will begin our trek down into the Canyon, stopping regularly for breaks, snacks and photo opportunities. Upon reaching the Colorado River, we cross the impressive Black Bridge, just a few minutes from our home for the next two nights at Bright Angel Campground. Relax by the creek while your guide sets up camp and prepares a delicious dinner. You will also have a chance to visit Phantom Ranch and take in a ranger-led program while the night sky fills with an unimaginable number of stars.
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 4800 foot descent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Our second day affords us the opportunity to explore the many wonderful side canyons and trails in the bottom of the Canyon. In the morning, we will hike up the Clear Creek Trail to stunning views of the Colorado River. The afternoon offers an exploration of The Box, a stretch of narrow canyon bound by 1000-foot cliffs of ancient granite and schist. Other opportunities exist for this day, as well, and your guide will be sure to outline all options for this day.
Distance & Elevation: up to 8 miles, variable elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After an early breakfast we will begin our hike back up to the South Rim. Enjoy stunning views along the Colorado River before heading up Pipe Creek along the Bright Angel Trail. This trail offers a wonderful contrast to the views found along the Kaibab Trail on Day 1. Keep your eyes open for bighorn sheep and the endangered California condors soaring overhead. Enjoy a tasty lunch along the way while taking in the sweeping views across to the North Rim. You will thrill at the feeling of reaching the trailhead in Grand Canyon Village, knowing that you have just completed one of the greatest hikes in the world.
Distance & Elevation: 9.5 miles, 4400 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Temporary Itinerary Change (through September 30, 2025)
Due to a temporary closure of the River Trail, which provides access to the Bright Angel Trail from Bright Angel Campground, all Bright Angel Loop trips will need to exit the canyon via the South Kaibab Trail on the last day.
Day 1
This classic Grand Canyon hiking tour starts on the famous South Kaibab Trail. It’s nothing but fantastic views from top to bottom on this well-traveled route. Upon reaching the Colorado River, we cross the impressive Black Bridge, just a few minutes from our home for the next two nights at Phantom Ranch. Enjoy a refreshing shower when we arrive and a little time to relax before a delicious dinner. In the evening, take in a ranger-led program while the night sky fills with an unimaginable number of stars.
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 4800 foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Our second day affords us the opportunity to explore the many wonderful side canyons and trails in the bottom of the Canyon. In the morning, we will hike up the Clear Creek Trail to stunning views of the Colorado River. The afternoon offers an exploration of The Box, a stretch of narrow canyon bound by 1000-foot cliffs of ancient granite and schist. Other opportunities exist for this day, as well, and your guide will be sure to outline all options for this day.
Distance & Elevation: up to 8 miles, variable elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After an early breakfast we will begin our hike back up to the South Rim. Enjoy stunning views along the Colorado River before heading up Pipe Creek along the Bright Angel Trail. This trail offers a wonderful contrast to the views found along the Kaibab Trail on Day 1. Keep your eyes open for bighorn sheep and the endangered California condors soaring overhead. Enjoy a tasty lunch along the way while taking in the sweeping views across to the North Rim. You will thrill at the feeling of reaching the trailhead in Grand Canyon Village, knowing that you have just completed one of the greatest hikes in the world.
Distance & Elevation: 9.5 miles, 4400 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
*2-Day Itineraries follow Days 1 & 3 of the above described itinerary.
Temporary Itinerary Change (through September 30, 2025)
Due to a temporary closure of the River Trail, which provides access to the Bright Angel Trail from Phantom Ranch, all Phantom Ranch trips will need to exit the canyon via the South Kaibab Trail on the last day.
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for your scenic drive through northern Arizona. Our destination will be the South Rim of Grand Canyon for a scenic day hike, viewpoints and a picnic lunch. We will choose an exciting trail and venture more than a thousand feet below the rim to soak up the majestic views and tranquil wilderness. After the hike we will rest our legs while we take in remarkable vistas including the many colorful layers of the Painted Desert, Little Colorado River Gorge, and Vermillion Cliffs before arriving at Marble Canyon. Enjoy a shower before a relaxing dinner at the lodge.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours to South Rim, then 1.5 hours to Marble Canyon
Distance & Elevation: up to 6 miles, 1500 foot descent/ascent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After a delicious breakfast at the lodge, we are off for a full day of exploring some quiet, off-the-beaten-path canyons. We will embark on an exciting hike through a stunning, narrow canyon that winds its way down to the banks of the Colorado River. The gorge grows deeper with every step, until the cliffs are several hundred feet overhead. Arriving at the banks of the river, we will pause to relax and soak in the beauty of this beautiful and remote location. We return the way we came and then head over to the historic Navajo Bridge for lunch. Keep your eyes peeled for the chance of sighting the remarkable California Condors that frequent this site. After lunch, it’s off to a little-known and seldom-visited canyon that meanders to a perennial waterfall tucked away in a secret alcove. After a full day of exploring, we will return to the lodge for showers and dinner.
Drive Time: 30 minutes
Distance & Elevation: ~6 miles, 500 foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Buckskin Gulch is the longest slot canyon in the world. Our access is via another, even narrower canyon where the sculpted sandstone walls are often only a few feet wide. Arriving in Buckskin, the canyon walls now tower 150 feet overhead and widen to about 20 feet. We will spend a few hours exploring this serpentine labyrinth admiring nature’s wondrous creation. If time permits later in the day, we will head to a wonderful expanse of sculpted rocks unknown to most visitors. This otherworldly landscape is unlike anything you’ve seen. After another great day of exploring, it’s back to the lodge for showers and dinner, and perhaps some evening stargazing.
Drive Time: 2 hours roundtrip
Distance & Elevation: ~8 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After a final breakfast at the lodge and checking out, we are off for one more day of adventuring. We will drive to nearby Lee’s Ferry, the historic river crossing that marks the geographic beginning of Grand Canyon. Our hike entails a 2-mile, steep ascent to the top of the Echo Cliffs. The jaw-dropping views from the top will leave you breathless: the sinuous Glen Canyon to the north and Marble Canyon to the south. Then it’s back down to Lee’s Ferry for lunch by the banks of the Colorado River and some final sightseeing before the journey home. We will arrive in Flagstaff by approximately 4:00pm.
Distance & Elevation: 4.5 miles, 1700 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 2 hours back to Flagstaff
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for your scenic drive through northern Arizona. Our destination will be the South Rim of Grand Canyon for a scenic day hike, viewpoints and a picnic lunch. We will choose a classic trail and venture more than a thousand feet below the rim to soak up the majestic views and tranquil wilderness. After the hike we will rest our legs while we take in remarkable vistas including the many colorful layers of the Painted Desert, Little Colorado River Gorge, and Vermilion Cliffs before arriving at Marble Canyon. We will have a chance to get cleaned up before a relaxing dinner at the lodge.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours to South Rim, then 1.5 hours to Marble Canyon
Distance & Elevation: ~6 miles, 1500 foot descent/ascent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After an early breakfast we are off for a full day of exploring. Buckskin Gulch is the longest slot canyon in the world. Our access is via another, even narrower canyon where the sculpted sandstone walls are often only a few feet wide. Arriving in Buckskin, the canyon walls now tower 150 feet overhead and widen to about 20 feet. We will spend a few hours exploring this serpentine labyrinth admiring nature’s wondrous creation. If time permits later in the day, we will head to a wonderful expanse of sculpted rocks unknown to most visitors. This otherworldly landscape is unlike anything you’ve seen. After another great day of exploring, it’s back to the lodge for showers and dinner, and perhaps some evening stargazing.
Drive Time: 2 hours roundtrip
Distance & Elevation: ~8 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today’s journey will begin early as we drive to the 9000ft Kaibab Plateau and Grand Canyon’s North Rim. Numerous hiking trails offer opportunities to get below the rim or visit isolated viewpoints away from the crowds. We will spend time venturing below the rim as well as exploring remote vistas. If time permits, we will stop by the historic Grand Canyon Lodge, a spectacular example of turn-of-the-century architecture perched right on the rim. Regardless of the exact itinerary, we will spend a full day exploring this remarkable area.
Drive Time: 3 hours roundtrip
Distance & Elevation: ~6 to 10 miles, up to 1500 foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
May & June Departures: Today we will pack up and be on our way after breakfast. We then meet our raft guides for a float trip on the Colorado River through stunning Glen Canyon. This flat-water stretch of river features 2000 foot cliffs of red Navajo sandstone, ancient rock art and epic views of Glen Canyon Dam. Our river tour begins and ends at Lee’s Ferry, the official beginning of Grand Canyon. At the conclusion of the float trip, we will begin our drive back to Flagstaff.
September, October, & November Departures: After a final breakfast at the lodge and checking out, we are off for one more day of adventuring. We will drive to nearby Lee’s Ferry, the historic river crossing that marks the geographic beginning of Grand Canyon. Our hike entails a 2-mile, steep ascent to the top of the Echo Cliffs, gaining 1800 feet in elevation. The jaw-dropping views from the top will leave you breathless: the sinuous Glen Canyon to the north and Marble Canyon to the south. Then it’s back down to Lee’s Ferry for lunch by the banks of the Colorado River and some final sightseeing before the journey home.
Drive Time: 2.5 hours total
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for your scenic drive through northern Arizona. Our destination will be the South Rim of Grand Canyon for our first hike. Our trail descends into the depths of the canyon via switchbacks and longer traverses along a rocky ridgeline offering panoramic views that are hard to beat. Our goal is a promontory of limestone offering glimpses of the Colorado River as it meanders along the canyon bottom, still a few thousand feet below us. We return the way we came, all the while learning about the canyon’s geologic history, plants and animals and tales of early explorers. Enjoy a picnic lunch on the trail before returning to the rim. We then head to the Yavapai Observation Point for more incredible canyon views before checking into our hotel. You’ll have a chance to rest and get cleaned up before a delicious dinner at a nearby restaurant.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours to South Rim
Distance & Elevation: ~6 miles, 2000 foot descent/ascent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After an early breakfast we are off for another day of exploring. We’ll head for a quiet trail to the west of Grand Canyon Village and descend into a peaceful basin of pinyon pine and juniper. Here the trail levels out and winds its way along the head of a deep gorge towards an idyllic spring tucked away in a sandstone alcove. You’ll learn the history of the prospectors and early guides that built these trails and welcomed tourists in the late 19th century. Upon returning to the rim, we will begin our journey to Sedona, passing through the gorgeous Oak Creek Canyon on one of the most scenic roads in Arizona. We’ll check into our hotel, clean up and head out for dinner at one of Sedona’s great local restaurants.
Drive Time: 2 hours from Grand Canyon to Sedona
Distance & Elevation: 5 miles, 1680 foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
For our Sedona introduction, we will tackle one of the region’s most exciting hikes. Today’s loop hike features spectacular views in one of the most scenic corners of Sedona. We follow the path of the old wagon trails, then ascend to a slickrock saddle high above Bear Wallow Canyon to the south and Oak Creek canyon to the north. Epic views unfold as we wind our way around Mitten Ridge and enjoy 360-degree panoramic vistas. A few sections of slickrock hiking with exposure to heights will add an element of excitement and our professional guides will offer support and guidance for those not used to slickrock hiking and you will learn how to “trust your hiking shoes”, build your confidence, and earn the rewards of this stunning landscape. We’ll then descend via the Cow Pies Trail, named for the unique sandstone rock formations along the way, and close the loop back to the starting trailhead. If time permits after the hike, we can stop in Uptown Sedona to spend some time browsing the shops and art galleries.
Distance & Elevation: 8.5 miles, 1100-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
On our final day, we’ll head to one of the most iconic destinations in Sedona. Our hike begins near famous Bell Rock and crosses an undulating landscape of pinyon pine and juniper forest before ascending the sandstone benches along the eastern flank of Cathedral Rock, perhaps the single most-photographed formation in Sedona. We continue north where our trail dips down to the banks of Oak Creek, where we’ll enjoy a final lunch by the water. We then retrace our steps back to Cathedral Rock and then connect with another trail back to our starting point. At the hike’s conclusion, we’ll head back to Flagstaff for farewells, arriving around 4pm.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours total
Distance & Elevation: ~7 miles, 600 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
This fantastic Grand Canyon hiking tour begins at the South Rim. We kick things off with a hike on one of the South Rim’s best trails. The Hermit Trail offers a chance to hike below the South Rim while avoiding the crowds on the busier trails. Stunning views and tranquil solitude make this an excellent beginning to your Grand Canyon exploration. After a picnic lunch along the trail, we return to the rim and begin making our way east to Desert View for its spectacular and unique views of the canyon and the distant Painted Desert. We then exit the park and drive through the Painted Desert to our cozy lodge in Marble Canyon. After some well-deserved showers, we will head out for a delicious dinner at the on-site restaurant.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours to South Rim, then 1.5 hours to Marble Canyon
Distance & Elevation: ~6 miles, 1500-foot descent/ascent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After an early breakfast we are off for a full day of exploring. We will take a quick drive to the trailhead for our first hike of the day, an exciting narrow canyon that leads to the banks of the Colorado River in Marble Canyon. This fun hike involves a bit of scrambling over boulders and along rock ledges as it meanders through towering limestone cliffs on its way to the river. Then it’s back to the car for the beautiful drive up to the North Rim. Upon arrival, we will have a quick check-in at the Grand Canyon Lodge followed by a hike out to Bright Angel Point, an incredible viewpoint perched along a narrow ridge offering wonderful canyon panoramas. Dinner tonight is at the spectacular North Rim Lodge dining room.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 350-foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we head out for a gorgeous hike through the North Rim’s ancient forests of firs, pines, and aspens. The Widforss Trail features terrific views, lots of fossils, relatively level hiking, and pleasant solitude. The trail contours the rim of Transept Canyon, a deep and stunning tributary canyon, whose floor is nearly 4000 feet below. Upon arrival at spectactular Widforss Point, we will enjoy a picnic lunch and savor the views before making our way back to the lodge. Enjoy some free time around the lodge before dinner: kick back and a rocking chair on the beautiful patio, peruse the book store and Visitor Center, shop for souvenirs, or stroll along the rim.
Drive Time: 10 minutes
Distance & Elevation: 10 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
An early start will allow enough time for breakfast and checking out of lodge before heading out for one last scenic hike before the return trip to Flagstaff. Two great options present themselves: a hike below the Rim on the North Kaibab Trail to the stunning Coconino Overlook or Cape Final to a quiet and unique viewpoint offering views across the Painted Desert and Marble Plateau, and all the way to Navajo Mountain in southern Utah. We will explore through lunchtime before beginning our journey home. Expect to arrive back in Flagstaff around 5pm.
Distance & Elevation: 3 to 5 miles, up to 800-foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 3.5 hours
Day 1
Meet your guide for breakfast and a brief orientation at 6am. Depart St. George for the short drive to Zion National Park’s Kolob Canyons on the seldom-visited western side of the park. Majestic peaks and towering cliffs surround us as we head towards our first hike, a short stroll to an incredible vista overlooking the region. Then it’s back on the road on our way to Bryce Canyon. En route, we’ll stop for a picnic lunch at Red Canyon and enjoy another short walk to introduce us to the unique geology of the region. We arrive at Bryce mid-afternoon and check into our lodge before meeting your guide for a walk along the rim and a breathtaking introduction to this natural wonder.
Drive Time: ~3 hours
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 3 to 4 miles, minimal elevation
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today we explore beneath the rim of Bryce Canyon. The Fairyland Loop offers all that Bryce is famous for: unique rock towers (hoodoos), natural arches and windows and spectacular views. And it’s also less crowded than some of the other trails in the park. You’ll enjoy the fascinating features like the Chinese Wall, Boat Mesa and Tower Bridge. There are plentiful ups and downs along the way making this a moderately strenuous hike but the rewards are plentiful!
Drive Time: n/a
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2300 foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After breakfast, we depart for Grand Canyon’s North Rim. Our scenic drive takes us down through the multi-colored hues of the Grand Staircase, across the Arizona Strip, and up to the cool, forested heights of the Kaibab Plateau. Our first glimpse of the canyon is earned via a pleasant 2-mile hike through Ponderosa pine forest to a secluded viewpoint that we just might have to ourselves. After soaking in the tremendous scenery, we return the way we came and head to the North Rim Lodge, our home for the next two nights. If time permits before dinner, we will enjoy a walk out to Bright Angel Point for more dramatic views and photo opportunities.
Drive Time: 3 hours
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 4 to 5 miles, 200 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Today’s journey will bring us incredible views from the rim as we explore one of the lesser-traveled trails in the park. The Widforss Trail winds along the rim through beautiful forests of spruce, aspen and fir, and past ancient fossil beds towards a spectacular and secluded viewpoint. Don’t expect to see too many other people out here. You’ll feel like you have Grand Canyon to yourself! Enjoy some free time in the late afternoon to relax around the lodge grounds, sip on a cold drink on the patio or explore the nearby Transept Trail.
Drive Time: 10 minutes
Hiking Distance & Elevation: up to 10 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
Our final destination on this spectacular tour is Zion National Park. Entering through the east side of the park, we are greeted by a pine and juniper studded landscape of the white sandstone domes of Checkerboard Mesa. Mysterious and inviting canyons head off in every direction as we approach the Zion-Carmel Tunnel. As we exit the tunnel, an unrivaled view unfolds before us as we descend the numerous switchbacks to the bottom of Zion Canyon. We will spend the afternoon exploring the canyon from below and enjoying a hike to the famed Emerald Pools.
Drive Time: 3 hours
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 3 to 4 miles, 400 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 6
Our final day in Zion offers us the opportunity to hike the steep and exciting trail to Angel’s Landing, offering one of the best views in the park. Climb up to Refrigerator Canyon, through Walter’s Wiggles and past Scout’s Lookout to the final ascent to the Landing. This narrow trail offers many chains, guard rails and carved steps for your peace-of-mind but might leave those with a fear of heights with shaky knees! Nonetheless, the rewards from trail’s end are magnificent views of the canyon below and are well-worth the effort. We return the way we came, and enjoy a final, hearty lunch before loading up for the drive back to St. George for farewells.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 1500 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: ~1 hour
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for your scenic drive through northern Arizona to the South Rim of Grand Canyon for our first hike. We begin with one of the most well-known trails in the park: the Bright Angel Trail. Our route follows a geologic fault line that has been used to access the inner canyon for thousands of years, as evidenced by the subtle traces left by prehistoric peoples that once called this area home. Along the way, your guide will introduce you to the fascinating geologic story of the canyon’s formation, the human history of the region, and the local flora and fauna. The Bright Angel Trail offers and excellent introduction to hiking in the Grand Canyon and will warm us up for the next few days. After the hike, we head to the Yavapai Geology Museum for more incredible canyon views and fascinating displays before checking into our hotel. You’ll have a chance to relax and get cleaned up before dinner at a nearby restaurant.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours to South Rim
Distance & Elevation: up to 6 miles, 2000-foot descent/ascent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After an early breakfast, we are off for another full day of exploring. Our trail descends into the depths of the canyon via switchbacks and longer traverses along a rocky ridgeline offering panoramic views that are hard to beat and offer a significant contrast to yesterday’s hike. Our goal is a promontory of limestone offering glimpses of the Colorado River as it meanders along the canyon bottom, still a few thousand feet below us. We return the way we came, all the while learning more about the canyon’s geologic history and tales of early explorers. Enjoy a picnic lunch on the trail before returning to the rim. We then head east to the spectacular Desert View Watchtower, where the canyon views are dramatically different than we’ve seen so far. After soaking in the beauty, we return to the lodge to clean up before dinner.
Drive Time: up to 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 2000-foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
For our final hike, we’ll head for a quiet trail to the west of Grand Canyon Village and descend into a peaceful basin of pinyon pine and juniper. Here the trail levels out and winds its way along the head of a deep gorge towards an idyllic spring tucked away in a sandstone alcove. You’ll learn the history of the prospectors and early guides that built these trails and welcomed tourists in the late 19th century. We’ll enjoy a final canyon lunch together below the rim. After another great day of hiking, we’ll head back to Flagstaff for fond farewells.
Distance & Elevation: up to 6 miles, 1800-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
-
-
-
-
-
-
Day 1
Depart St. George early for your scenic drive through southern Utah. Upon arriving in the Escalante area, we will finalize our packing and meet our shuttle driver who will transport us to our starting point near the town of Boulder. After final preparations, we will begin our hike to Death Hollow. The stunted pine forests quickly give way to a seemingly endless slickrock wilderness ahead as we begin our short descent to the bed of Sand Creek. When then continue across more open slickrock to a spectacular overlook above Death Hollow. Watch your footing as we make the exciting descent to the floor of the canyon. We will make camp beneath the towering pines along the banks of Death Hollow’s perennial stream.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 700 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today’s hike will be highlighted by Mamie Natural Bridge and the epic views across Antone Flats. After the challenging climb out of Death Hollow, you will be treated to more incredible views while we traverse the slickrock on our way to Mamie Canyon. We will drop our backpacks and make the short walk down to Mamie Natural Bridge for lunch. Next, we will return to our backpacks and make our way towards Antone Flats for our second night’s camp. Enjoy the beautiful sunset over the Death Hollow Wilderness as your guides prepares a delicious dinner.
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 1000 foot ascent/500 descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After a tasty breakfast, we pack up camp and head out across the rest of Antone Flats and up to a high ridge overlooking Pine Creek and the town of Escalante. Back to west, you are rewarded with views across the entire Death Hollow Wilderness and Boulder Mountain to the north. We begin the scenic descent towards Pine Creek and its confluence with the Escalante River, where we will head east into the sandstone gorge below. Watch as the walls grow higher with each sinuous bend in the canyon. We will camp this evening beneath a giant, natural sandstone alcove.
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 700 descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Enjoy your morning coffee as the sunrise glows golden upon the towering cliffs around you. Another breakfast and it’s on downstream. The Escalante River (more like a small stream) creates a lush canyon oasis, complete with cottonwood trees and swimming holes. As we continue down the canyon, we’ll see ancient Native American cliff dwellings, rock art, and beautiful streaks of desert varnish on the canyon walls. As we reach the confluence with the mouth of Death Hollow, we will drop our packs and enjoy a side hike into its lower reaches. Then it’s on to our final night’s camp near a natural sandstone arch on the canyon rim.
Distance & Elevation: 8 to 10 miles, 200 descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
Our final day of hiking will take us the last few miles to our endpoint near Calf Creek. Enjoy views from beneath Escalante Natural Bridge and a stop at the Hundred Hand Panel, a remarkable rock art site. After a rewarding lunch back at the trailhead and a quick pit stop in the town of Escalante, we’ll make the drive back to St. George, arriving by 5pm.
Distance & Elevation: 4 miles, minimal descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 4 hours
4-Day Option
This shorter itinerary offers an easier, more relaxed pace and offers more opportunities to explore the slickrock expanses and inviting canyons with small day packs. Day 4 will end at the junction of Pine Creek and the Escalante River. Contact us for details.
Day 1
This rewarding Utah backpacking tour starts at Egypt Bench, a remote location down the famous Hole In The Rock Road in Grand Staircase-Escalante National Monument. After final packing at the trailhead, we will begin our hike across open slickrock and descend into Fence Canyon. Our camp that night will be along the Escalante River, in what used to be an old cowboy camp.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 1000 foot descent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After a hearty breakfast we continue down into the depths of this fantastic canyon towards Neon Canyon, home to the Golden Cathedral, a remarkable sandstone alcove featuring an amazing triple arch in the ceiling. After snapping some photos, we’ll load up the backpacks and head further downstream to our camp for the night. Each bend of the canyon will bring more and more rewarding views. The afternoon offers the opportunity to explore some overland routes that offer incredible views of Navajo Mountain, Chop Rock and the Straight Cliffs.
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today’s journey will head further down the ever-winding Escalante River Gorge, passing ancient rock art and stopping along the way to investigate more inviting tributary drainages and secret slot canyons. Our backpacking miles will be short today so that we can enjoy more day hiking exploration.
Distance & Elevation : 6 miles, up to 800 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After a great sunrise over canyon country, we will begin our exit out of this sandstone maze. Once on the rim, you will enjoy incredible vistas of the Escalante River canyons, Capitol Reef, and the Henry Mountains, one of the last places in the lower 48 states to be mapped. The cross-country route is one of the highlights of the hike and will offer views you won’t soon forget. Once back at the trailhead, we’ll celebrate with a delicious lunch before heading back to St. George.
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 4 hours
Day 1
Depart St. George early for your scenic drive through Southern Utah. Upon arriving in the Escalante area, we will stop for lunch in Devil’s Garden, a land of impressive hoodoos and sandstone formations. After some exploration here, it’s off to the trailhead for final packing and the beginning of our hike into Coyote Gulch. A cross-country route brings to an easy descent to the canyon bottom. Our first night’s camp hints to the wonders that await further down canyon.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 600 foot descent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After a tasty breakfast, we will breakdown camp and head on downstream. The lush canyon is a striking contrast to the dry, slickrock mesas above. Enjoy the new and exciting views that unfold around every corner. The towering sandstone walls twist and turn and we explore ever deeper, passing through giant alcoves and beneath massive natural arches. Camp tonight will be somewhere in the vicinity of Coyote Natural Bridge.
Distance & Elevation : 6 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Onward down the canyon! Today’s adventure is with small day packs, as we leave camp behind and explore without the burden of backpacks. Visit some ancient archeological sites and pictographs and maybe take a dip in hidden, spring-fed pools along the way. Our goal is the confluence with the Escalante River where we’ll enjoy views of the impressive Steven’s Arch. After lunch along the banks of the Escalante, we’ll head back to camp, enjoying the numerous sights missed on the way down.
Distance & Elevation: 8-10 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Enjoy a tasty breakfast while your guide packs up camp before heading off on the final day’s hike. We will head back the way we came but utilize another exciting tributary canyon for our exit. Upon reaching the rim, we will enjoy the far-reaching views across the entire Escalante region as we find our way across open slickrock benches back to the trailhead. After a delicious lunch overlooking this amazing canyon country, we will head back to St. George.
Distance & Elevation: 6-7 miles, 600 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 4 hours
Day 1
Depart Flagstaff early for a very scenic drive through the Painted Desert, Monument Valley and up the Moqui Dugway, an exciting gravel path carved out of sheer canyon walls. After final packing at the trailhead, we begin our gradual descent into the slickrock maze via Kane Gulch. The wide open upper reaches of the canyon gradually narrow and the sandstone walls eventually tower overhead. Soon enough, the first signs of ancient life appear high on the canyon walls. We will stop to visit a number of these sites and your guide will instruct the group on proper etiquette for discovering these irreplaceable relics. After enjoying these intriguing sites, we will eventually make camp near the junction with a small tributary canyon offering further exploration, but we’ll save that for tomorrow. Enjoy a delicious dinner as the sun sets and the stars fill the night sky.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 500-foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After an early breakfast, we are off for a full day of exploring side canyons and hidden secrets. Todie Canyon offers impressive canyon scenery as well as a few ruins worth investigating. After a morning of exploring, we return to camp for lunch, pack up, and head further into the depths of Grand Gulch. This stretch of canyon is one of the richest concentrations of archaeological sites in the entire Southwest. We will make frequent stops to explore these relics and learn more about the ancestral Puebloan culture. Many wonderful campsites present themselves along the way so the group can decide to make camp at any time.
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 300-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
More fun awaits on Day 3! Highlights include Split Level Ruin, Coyote Canyon, and Sheiks Canyon. As the canyon deepens, the views become progressively more impressive with every turn. We eventually reach the junction with Bullet Canyon and our route out of Grand Gulch. Camp is found near the junction and the afternoon can be spent exploring the lower reaches of the Gulch.
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 400-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
We begin our final climb and bid farewell to this incredible outdoor museum, but not before we visit two of the most remarkable ruins yet! Some secrets are worth keeping so we won’t spoil the surprise. After exploring these final sites, we make the exciting hike out of Bullet Canyon, arriving at our endpoint around lunchtime. Bid a fond farewell to this explorer’s paradise and start planning your next adventure! Plan to arrive back in Flagstaff by 5pm.
Distance & Elevation: 5 miles, 1100-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 4 hours
Day 1
Meet your guide for breakfast and a brief orientation at 6am. Depart St. George for the 1 hour drive to Zion National Park. Our first hike in Zion offers us the opportunity to hike up the canyon’s towering walls to Scout Lookout, offering incredible views high above the canyon floor. After lofty views in the morning, we will spend the afternoon exploring the canyon from below and enjoying a hike to the famed and beautiful Emerald Pools. * This first night’s accommodation will be a cozy lodge in the town of Springdale, adjacent to the Park Entrance. This will afford a far better night’s sleep than in Zion’s loud and crowded campgrounds. We will enjoy dinner together at one of Springdale’s excellent local restaurants.
Drive Time: 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: ~7 miles, 2000-foot acent/descent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Next it’s off to Bryce Canyon. Today we explore along and beneath the rim of Bryce Canyon. The Fairyland Loop offers all that Bryce is famous for: unique rock towers (hoodoos), natural arches and windows and spectacular views. And it’s also less crowded than some of the other trails in the park. You’ll enjoy the fascinating features like the Chinese Wall, Boat Mesa and Tower Bridge. There are plentiful ups and downs along the way making this a moderately strenuous hike but the rewards are plentiful! After our hike, we will head to our campsite near the town of Escalante.
Drive Time: 2.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2300 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Slot Canyons!!! Perhaps you’ve seen them in pictures but to walk through these spectacular, narrow canyons is an experience you won’t soon forget. Beautifully carved by endless centuries of rushing water, these sandstone canyons are a photographers dream. You’ve got to see it to believe it! A visit to Devil’s Garden with its unique rock formations will round out another fabulous day in Canyon Country.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Today is all about waterfalls! Calf Creek is a gorgeous canyon with lush vegetation, cool, clear water and the idyllic Lower Calf Creek Falls. Enjoy a dip in the creek while your guide prepares a tasty lunch beneath the shady cottonwoods. If time allows, there is an opportunity to visit Upper Calf Creek Falls, an equally breathtaking oasis.
Drive Time: 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, 400 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
On our final day, we will pack up camp and head back towards St. George. We will travel into a hidden garden of slickrock and hoodoos, outstanding natural features creating a maze of sandstone formations awaiting your contemplation. Stunning views and quiet trails are the flavor of the day in this seldom-visited jewel of Canyon Country. Your guide will choose one of many great hikes to suit the desires of the group. After lunch, we will finish up the drive back to St. George for farewells.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 3 to 5 miles, 500 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Meet your guide at the Best Western Abbey Inn for a brief orientation at 6am. Depart St. George for the 2 hour drive to Bryce Canyon National Park. Today we explore along and beneath the rim of Bryce Canyon. We embark on a great hike that offers all that Bryce is famous for: unique rock towers (hoodoos), natural arches and windows and spectacular views. And it’s also less crowded than some of the other trails in the park. You’ll enjoy the fascinating features like the Chinese Wall, Boat Mesa and Tower Bridge. There are many ups and downs along the way making this a moderately strenuous hike but the rewards are plentiful! After our hike, we will head to our beautiful campsite near the town of Escalante.
Drive Time: 2 hours to Bryce, 1 hour to Escalante
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2300 feet of elevation change
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today we are off for a full day of exploring the secrets of the Escalante River Canyon. This beautiful redrock canyon holds endless hidden treasures. This lush oasis provides a stark contrast to the surrounding desert wilderness. Highlights include Maverick Natural Bridge, Escalante Natural Bridge and ancient rock art. Be sure to bring your water sandals for the numerous stream crossings. After a full day of exploring, we’ll head back to our comfy campsite to settle in and clean up before dinner.
Drive Time: 45 minutes
Distance & Elevation: ~8 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today is all about waterfalls! Calf Creek is a gorgeous canyon with lush vegetation, cool, clear water and the idyllic Lower Calf Creek Falls. Enjoy a dip in the creek while your guide prepares a hearty lunch beneath the shady cottonwoods. If time allows in the afternoon, there is an opportunity to visit Upper Calf Creek Falls, an equally breathtaking oasis.
Drive Time: less than 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: 6-8 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Slot Canyons!!! Perhaps you’ve seen them in pictures but to walk through these spectacular, narrow canyons is an experience you won’t soon forget. Beautifully carved by endless centuries of rushing water, these sandstone canyons are a photographers dream. You’ve got to see it to believe it! A visit to Devil’s Garden with its unique rock formations will round out another fabulous day in Canyon Country.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
On our final day, we will pack up camp and head back towards St. George. We will travel into a hidden garden of slickrock and hoodoos, outstanding natural features creating a maze of sandstone formations awaiting your contemplation. Stunning views and quiet trails are the flavor of the day in this seldom-visited jewel of Canyon Country. Your guide will choose one of many great hikes to suit the desires of the group. After lunch, we will finish up the drive back to St. George for farewells.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 3 to 5 miles, 500 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
4-Day Option
For those looking for a shorter trip, our 4-day itinerary skips the hike in Bryce Canyon on Day 1 and instead heads straight to Escalante.
Day 1
Depart St. George early for the scenic drive through southern Utah. Our first stop is little-known region of beautiful rock formations not far from Bryce Canyon. We’ll stretch our legs as we wonder through the stunning views along quiet trails. We’ll enjoy a picnic lunch for heading into Bryce. We will hike the scenic Navajo Loop, enjoying wild formations with names like the Three Wise Men, Wall of Windows, and Thor’s Hammer. After a great first day of hiking, we’ll settle into our lodge before heading out to dinner at a nearby restaurant.
Drive Time: 2.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: up to 6 miles, 1500-foot ascent/descent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today we explore beneath the rim of Bryce Canyon. The Fairyland Loop offers all that Bryce is famous for: unique rock towers (hoodoos), natural arches and windows and spectacular views. And it’s also less crowded than some of the other trails in the park. You’ll enjoy the fascinating features like the Chinese Wall, Boat Mesa and Tower Bridge. There are plentiful ups and downs along the way making this a moderately strenuous hike but the rewards are plentiful!
Drive Time: n/a
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2300-foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we head on to Zion National Park. Entering through the east side of the park, we are greeted by a pine and juniper studded landscape of the white sandstone domes of Checkerboard Mesa. As we pass through the Zion-Carmel Tunnel, an unrivaled view unfolds before us as we descend the numerous switchbacks to the bottom of Zion Canyon. We head for the Watchman Trail, where we climb nearly 400 feet to earn views into Zion Canyon, as well as back towards the pleasant valley below and the town of Springdale. Back to the canyon floor, we’ll head up-canyon and spend the afternoon enjoying a hike to the famed Emerald Pools.
Drive Time: 1.25 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 1000-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Our final day in Zion offers us the opportunity to hike the steep and exciting trail to Scout Lookout, offering incredible views high above the canyon floor. Climb up to Refrigerator Canyon and through Walter’s Wiggles to Scout Lookout. Though the climb is arduous, the rewards from trail’s end are magnificent views of the canyon below and are well-worth the effort. We return the way we came, and enjoy a final, hearty lunch before loading up for the drive back to St. George for farewells.
Drive Time: 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: 5 miles, 1500-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Meet your guide for breakfast and a brief orientation at 6am. Depart St. George for the 1 hour drive to Zion National Park. Our first hike in Zion offers us the opportunity to hike up the canyon’s towering walls to Scout Lookout, offering incredible views high above the canyon floor. After lofty views in the morning, we will spend the afternoon exploring the canyon from below and enjoying a hike to the famed and beautiful Emerald Pools.
Drive Time: 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: ~7 miles, 2000 foot ascent/descent
Lunch
Day 2
Next it’s off to Bryce Canyon. Today we explore along and beneath the rim of Bryce Canyon. The Fairyland Loop offers all that Bryce is famous for: unique rock towers (hoodoos), natural arches and windows and spectacular views. And it’s also less crowded than some of the other trails in the park. You’ll enjoy the fascinating features like the Chinese Wall, Boat Mesa and Tower Bridge. There are plentiful ups and downs along the way making this a moderately strenuous hike but the rewards are plentiful! After our hike, we will transfer to our lodge in the town of Escalante for showers before heading out for dinner at a local restaurant.
Drive Time: 2.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2300 foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Slot Canyons!!! Perhaps you’ve seen them in pictures but to walk through these spectacular, narrow canyons is an experience you won’t soon forget. Beautifully carved by endless centuries of rushing water, these sandstone canyons are a photographers dream. You’ve got to see it to believe it! A visit to Devil’s Garden with its unique rock formations will round out another fabulous day in Canyon Country.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Today is all about waterfalls! Calf Creek is a gorgeous canyon with lush vegetation, cool, clear water and the idyllic Lower Calf Creek Falls. Enjoy a dip in the creek while your guide prepares a tasty lunch beneath the shady cottonwoods. If time allows, there is an opportunity to visit Upper Calf Creek Falls, an equally breathtaking oasis.
Drive Time: 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, 400 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
On our final day, we will pack up and head back towards St. George. We will travel into a hidden garden of slickrock and hoodoos, outstanding natural features creating a maze of sandstone formations awaiting your contemplation. Soak it all in before the drive back to St. George.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 3 to 5 miles, 500 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Meet your guide at the Best Western Abbey Inn for a brief orientation at 6am. Depart St. George for the 2 hour drive to Bryce Canyon National Park. Today we explore along and beneath the rim of Bryce Canyon. We embark on a great hike that offers all that Bryce is famous for: unique rock towers (hoodoos), natural arches and windows and spectacular views. And it’s also less crowded than some of the other trails in the park. You’ll enjoy the fascinating features like the Chinese Wall, Boat Mesa and Tower Bridge. There are many ups and downs along the way making this a moderately strenuous hike but the rewards are plentiful! After our hike, we will head to our lodge in the town of Escalante for some hot showers before heading out for dinner at one of the nearby restaurants.
Drive Time: 2 hours to Bryce, 1 hour to Escalante
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2300 feet of elevation change
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today we are off for a full day of exploring the secrets of the Escalante River Canyon. This beautiful redrock canyon holds endless hidden treasures. This lush oasis provides a stark contrast to the surrounding desert wilderness. Highlights include Maverick Natural Bridge, Escalante Natural Bridge and ancient rock art. Be sure to bring your water sandals for the numerous stream crossings. After a full day of exploring, we’ll head back to our lodge to rest and clean up before dinner.
Drive Time: 45 minutes
Distance & Elevation: ~8 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today is all about waterfalls! Calf Creek is a gorgeous canyon with lush vegetation, cool, clear water and the idyllic Lower Calf Creek Falls. Enjoy a dip in the creek while your guide prepares a hearty lunch beneath the shady cottonwoods. If time allows in the afternoon, there is an opportunity to visit Upper Calf Creek Falls, an equally breathtaking oasis.
Drive Time: less than 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: 6-8 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Slot Canyons!!! Perhaps you’ve seen them in pictures but to walk through these spectacular, narrow canyons is an experience you won’t soon forget. Beautifully carved by endless centuries of rushing water, these sandstone canyons are a photographers dream. You’ve got to see it to believe it! A visit to Devil’s Garden with its unique rock formations will round out another fabulous day in Canyon Country.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
On our final day, we will pack up and head back towards St. George. We will travel into a hidden garden of slickrock and hoodoos, outstanding natural features creating a maze of sandstone formations awaiting your contemplation. Stunning views and quiet trails are the flavor of the day in this seldom-visited jewel of Canyon Country. Your guide will choose one of many great hikes to suit the desires of the group. After lunch, we will finish up the drive back to St. George for farewells.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 3 to 5 miles, 500 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
4-Day Option
For those looking for a shorter trip, our 4-day itinerary skips the hike in Bryce Canyon on Day 1 and instead heads straight to Escalante.
Day 1
Meet your guide at 7am for a brief orientation and then it’s off to nearby Arches National Park, home to the largest concentration of natural sandstone arches in the world. After a quick stop at the Visitor Center, we’ll head out for a hike to Delicate Arch, perhaps the most iconic arch in the park. Afterwards, we’ll enjoy lunch at Devil’s Garden and then head to the Fiery Furnace for a hike through some of the most fantastic redrock scenery in the world! This maze of sandstone fins and spires will amaze and bewilder and the contrast of deep red hues and impossibly blue skies makes for incredible photos. After our day of adventuring, it’s back to Moab to check in to our hotel. The evening is yours to dine out and wander through downtown Moab.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours total
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, ~500 feet of elevation change
Breakfast & Lunch
Day 2
Plan an early breakfast before we head out for a full day of exploring. Today we head to the Needles District of Canyonlands National Park, famous for its unique landscape of colorful sandstone spires and endless canyons. Our destination for today is Chesler Park, a beautiful, grassy expanse surrounded by colorful rock spires. If time permits and we’re feeling adventurous, we can explore the nearby Joint Trail, featuring exciting, deep crevices sometimes no more than 3 or 4 feet wide!
Drive Time: 3 hours total
Distance & Elevation: 9 to 11 miles, ~500 feet of elevation change
Breakfast & Lunch
Day 3
Today you will trade in your hiking boots for boats and paddles as you float down the famous Colorado River. We meet the raft guides in Moab at 8am for a quick orientation before transport to the launch site. You’ll relish in the beauty of the towering canyon walls as you splash and paddle your way down the river. Keep your eye out for eagles, great blue herons and maybe some bighorn sheep. Enjoy a BBQ lunch at a riverside ranch before hitting the famous White’s Rapid. Hold on tight! Plan on being out for most of the day.
14 miles rafting
Breakfast & Lunch
Day 4
Another day of adventure and exploring! We’ll start the day with a hike to Fisher Towers, massive sandstone fins reaching 900 feet high! The views from the base of The Titan are fantastic, taking in Castle Valley, the Book Cliffs and the Colorado River. In the afternoon, we’ll head to scenic Negro Bill Canyon for a hike to Morning Glory Natural Bridge. The trail crosses a small creek several times so water shoes or sport sandals are recommended. The canyon features 400-foot canyon walls streaked with desert varnish and lush vegetation. Morning Glory Natural Bridge stands in a gorgeous redrock alcove and spans 243 feet. The sunlight reflecting off the canyon walls washes the whole scene in a warm red glow making for wonderful photo opportunities. We’ll then retrace our path back to the car and head home to Moab for showers and well deserved relaxation.
Drive Time: 1 hour total
Distance & Elevation: 9 to 11 miles, ~700 feet of elevation gain
Breakfast & Lunch
Day 5
For our final day, we’re off to Canyonlands’ Island In The Sky District for endless panoramic views and redrock hiking. The Island is a high mesa resting 1000 feet above the greater Canyonlands region and offers unparalleled vistas of this incredible landscape. The hiking opportunities are many and varied, so the day can be highly customized to suit the abilities and desires of the group. Adventurous hikers might enjoy the Murphy Trail to Murphy Hogback, a slim mesa with stellar views of the White Rim and the surrounding canyons. The Neck Spring Loop is a pleasant walk just beneath the Island’s rim, through Pinon and Juniper woodlands and past small springs. Or fill up the day with a variety of short walks to ancient ruins, natural arches and incredible viewpoints. Whatever the group decides, the Island In The Sky will prove an amazing and fitting conclusion to your Canyon Country adventure. The group will say farewell and part ways back in Moab around 3pm.
Drive Time: 2 hours total
Distance & Elevation: 3 to 5 miles, ~500 feet of elevation change
Breakfast & Lunch
Day 1
Depart St. George early for the scenic drive through Southern Utah, bound for the town of Escalante. Our first hike will explore the upper reaches of the Escalante River Canyon. This sinuous gorge features towering cliffs, frequent stream crossings, and a beautiful riparian habitat in the high desert. You’ll learn about the surrounding geology, plant and animal life, and discover a number of pictographs, rock art left by the ancient civilizations that once called this region home. After reaching a spectacular alcove in the canyon wall, we will return the way we came. We will then transfer a short distance to our lodge in Escalante. Dinner will be at a local restaurant. *Hiking footwear appropriate for frequent stream crossings is required.
Drive Time: 3.25 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6.5 miles, minimal descent/ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After an early breakfast, we will check out of the lodge and start our journey towards Capitol Reef. But our day’s hiking starts only 30 minutes down the road. Calf Creek is a gorgeous canyon with lush vegetation, cool, clear water and the idyllic Lower Calf Creek Falls. After a visit to the lower falls, we will return to the trailhead and continue on to the town of Torrey, just west of Capitol Reef. If time permits before dinner, we can head off for a short stroll for some terrific views high above Sulphur Creek.
Drive Time: 1 hour and 45 minutes
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Capitol Reef is best known for its incomparable geology and our first hikes here will give us an excellent vantage point from which to take it all in. Our first trail climbs about 400 feet in elevation and instantly rewards with views of the surrounding landscape before tucking into a narrow canyon carved in the brilliant orange hues of the Wingate sandstone. Rock fins, hoodoos, and “swiss cheese” holes create a fantasy world of geologic wonders. As we pop out of the canyon’s depths, we are awarded with far-reaching views. Our second hike will highlight the depths of an impressive gorge that was once a pioneer road. This easy stroll passes historic inscriptions and ancient petroglyphs carved into the towering cliff walls.
Drive Time: Up to 1 hour
Distance & Elevation: 5 to 6 miles, 500 feet elevation gain/loss
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
A quick drive to our trailhead and we’ll dive into another watery canyon adventure. The narrows of Sulfur Creek wind through some of the oldest exposed rocks in the park. Numerous small waterfalls and shallow pools are encountered as we make our way upstream and we will need to negotiate a few short climbs as we go. It’s an adventurous hike that offers great rewards as we explore this scenic gorge. After our hike, we will begin our journey back westward for our final two nights in the town of Boulder. Enjoy a hot shower at the lodge, followed by an outstanding meal at a terrific local restaurant.
Drive Time: 1.25 hours
Distance & Elevation: 5 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
We’re back in the Grand Staircase-Escalante National Monument and today we are slickrock bound. We’ll head out on a lesser-known trail that once served as a mail-carrier route between the towns of Boulder and Escalante. Slickrock vistas in every direction are punctuated by several prominent canyons. We will hike across great expanses of Navajo sandstone studded with ponderosa and pinyon pines towards a jaw-dropping vantage point high above a deep and sinuous gorge. We’ll enjoy a delicious picnic lunch featuring epic views before returning the way we came.
Drive Time: 1 hour and 45 minutes
Distance & Elevation: 10 miles, 1000 feet elevation gain/loss
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 6
On our final day, we will check out of our lodge and head back towards St. George. A stop in Red Canyon State Park offers a final opportunity to get out and stretch our legs in this dramatic landscape. Stunning views and quiet trails are the flavor of the day in Red Canyon, a seldom-visited jewel of Canyon Country, with a resemblance to nearby Bryce Canyon. Your guide will choose one of many great hikes to suit the desires of the group. After lunch, we will finish up the drive back to St. George for farewells.
Drive Time: 4.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 4 miles, 500-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
This epic Yosemite hiking tour will start with the group meeting Curry Village at a predetermined time. After getting organized, we will catch a shuttle to the trailhead Glacier Point, well-known for its dramatic views of Half Dome, Tenaya Canyon and Nevada Falls. We’ll soon leave the crowds behind as we follow Illilouette Creek southeast into the Yosemite wilderness. Our first night’s camp will be along the creek. Your guide will set up camp and cook the first of many delicious meals.
Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 1000 foot descent/1200 foot ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We will start our morning with some hot coffee and a filling breakfast prepared by your guide. Shortly after that, we will pack up camp and continue on with our journey. Today we head up towards Lower Ottoway Lake. The hike is considerably more uphill than the first day but the views are no less rewarding. You’ll see Red Peak in the distance as you pass by Lower Merced Pass and turn up towards Ottoway Creek and our camp by the beautiful lake, deep in the heart of the Yosemite backcountry.
Distance & Elevation: 9 miles, 2500 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today is a big day as we head for Red Peak Pass, the high point of the journey at 11,150 feet. As always, these steep, strenuous climbs make the summit all the more rewarding. Red Peak Pass is the highest point reached by any trail in Yosemite National Park and we’ll spend some time soaking up the endless views of the High Sierra before starting our descent down the other side. We’ll pass numerous lakes along the way and maybe stop for a swim. Our goal for tonight’s camp is the Triple Peak Fork of the Merced River, about 2500 feet below the pass.
Distance & Elevation: 9 miles, 1500 foot ascent/ 2100 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Today we head towards Merced Lake. We’ll be heading generally downhill along the Merced River as it carves a beautiful canyon between towering granite cliffs. There are many tempting pools and waterfalls along the way that beckon us to stop for a refreshing dip. If we don’t make it all the way to Merced Lake, there are plenty of excellent places to camp along the way.
Distance/Elevation: 8-10 miles, 1800 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
After another night under the star filled sky, we will enjoy another tasty breakfast before packing up camp. We continue to follow the Merced River as it flows out from Merced Lake and begins its majestic descent through Echo and Lost Valleys. The smooth granite walls surround us and the river rushes over endless chutes and waterfalls and into delightful pools. This is one of the most scenic stretches of trail in the park and we’ll take our time to revel in the surroundings. Our final night’s camp is in Little Yosemite Valley.
Distance/Elevation: 7 to 8 miles, 1000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 6
Our final day offers a shorter hike as we head back to Happy Isles in Yosemite Valley. The hike out will follow the historic John Muir Trail back to the valley. This route winds through beautiful forest along the Merced River, affording stunning views of Nevada and Vernal Falls. We will arrive back at the parking area to sort through our gear before heading back to Curry Village for a final lunch and fond farewells.
Distance/Elevation: 5.5 miles, 2000-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
This classic Yosemite backpacking adventure starts in Curry Village in Yosemite Valley at a pre-determined time. From here we will catch a scenic, hour-long shuttle to Tenaya Lake and the Sunrise Trailhead. On today’s hike we will leave beautiful Tenaya Lake in the background as we climb gradually to our first nights camp along the banks of Sunrise Lake. Once settled in, there will be opportunities to explore the area or just relax in this alpine wonderland.
Shuttle Time: 1 hour
Distance/Elevation: 5 miles, 1200 foot ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After breakfast we will pack up camp – hiking out of the spruce and fir forest and gaining incredible views of Tenaya Canyon and the Sunrise Mountain area. Our destination is Clouds Rest (9926ft). We will take time here to soak in some of the biggest views Yosemite has to offer. From the summit you will be looking down at Half Dome, Yosemite Valley and all the surrounding granite domes and peaks for which Yosemite is famous. After our spectacular morning hike we will work our way to camp so we can rest up for the following day.
Distance/Elevation: 9 miles, 1000 foot ascent/ 2000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
With a very early start, we will have breakfast and then begin our trek towards the Half Dome summit, leaving our big packs back at camp so we can travel up and down Half Dome with just the necessities in small day packs. We will take in views of Basket Dome, North Dome and Clouds Rest as we work our way up to Sub Dome and the base of the cables. The trail is steep and demanding but the views in the early morning are unforgettable. We will break at Sub Dome, catch our breaths, and enjoy a snack. From here, we will begin our climb up The Cables where you will gain the final 400 feet to the top of Half Dome. Enjoy the 360 degree panorama stretching from El Capitan to the colorful Clark Range and everything in between. This is a truly remarkable location to spend some time. After resting and soaking in the views, we will retrace our steps back to camp. From here we will continue on the historic John Muir Trail to the Little Yosemite Valley and the Merced River for our last night.
Distance/Elevation: 9 miles, 2000 foot ascent/ 2500 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
*Notes about climbing Half Dome- The Cable Route is not for everyone. It is extremely exposed and steep and those with a fear of heights will NOT enjoy it. However, summiting Half Dome is not required and the views from Sub Dome are also spectacular! Those choosing not to summit can wait at Sub Dome and enjoy the sights until the rest of the group returns.
Day 4
After another night under the star filled sky, we will enjoy one last breakfast in the wilderness before packing up camp. The hike out will follow the historic John Muir Trail back to the valley. This route winds through beautiful forest along the opposite the side of the Merced River, affording equally stunning views as our hike up on the first day. We will arrive back at the parking area to sort through our gear before car-pooling back to Curry Village for a final lunch and fond farewells.
Distance/Elevation: 5.5 miles/2000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
We will meet at Curry Village in Yosemite Valley at a pre-determined time. The first day will be spent hiking the Mist Trail and exploring the waterfalls (320 foot Vernal Falls and 594 foot Nevada Falls) that have given this trail its name. We pass through forests of black oak and ponderosa pine as our trail heads relentlessly upward. There is good reason to stop and catch your breath often, as the views that unfold will leave you speechless. Enjoy lunch atop Nevada Falls, where the trail flattens out for the final mile to camp in Little Yosemite Valley. Drop your backpack, pat yourself on the back and relax as your guide sets up camp. The remainder of the afternoon is free to spend time by the river, enjoy a nearby swimming hole, or just relax and enjoy the remarkable surroundings. Your guide will prepare a delicious dinner before settling in for the evening.
Distance/Elevation: 4 miles, 2000 foot ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
With a very early start, we will have breakfast and then begin our trek towards the summit of Half Dome, leaving our big packs back at camp so we can travel up and down Half Dome with just the necessities in small day packs. We will take in views of Basket Dome, North Dome and Clouds Rest as we work our way up to Sub Dome and the base of the cables. The trail is steep and demanding but the views in the early morning are unforgettable. We will break at Sub Dome, catch our breaths, and enjoy a snack. From here, we will begin our climb up The Cables where you will gain the final 400 feet to the top of Half Dome. Enjoy the 360 degree panorama stretching from El Capitan to the colorful Clark Range and everything in between. This is a truly remarkable location to spend some time. After resting and soaking in the views, we will retrace our steps back to camp. Enjoy some free time in the afternoon to relish in your accomplishment.
Distance/Elevation: 7 miles, 2600 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
*Notes about climbing Half Dome- The Cable Route is not for everyone. It is extremely exposed and steep and those with a fear of heights will NOT enjoy it. However, summiting Half Dome is not required and the views from Sub Dome are also spectacular! Those choosing not to summit can wait at Sub Dome and enjoy the sights until the rest of the group returns.
Day 3
After another night under the star filled sky, we will enjoy one last breakfast in the wilderness before packing up camp. The hike out will follow the historic John Muir Trail back to the valley. This route winds through beautiful forest along the opposite the side of the Merced River, affording equally stunning views as our hike up on the first day. We will arrive back at the parking area to sort through our gear before car-pooling back to Curry Village for a final lunch and fond farewells.
Distance/Elevation: 5 miles, 2000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch
4-Day Itinerary
A 4-day itinerary starts at the Mono Meadows Trailhead and spends Night 1 in the Illilouette Creek area before heading to Little Yosemite Valley on Day 2. This is an alternate itinerary based on permit availability.
Day 1
We will meet at Curry Village in Yosemite Valley at a pre-determined time. The first day will be spent hiking the Mist Trail and exploring the waterfalls (320 foot Vernal Falls and 594 foot Nevada Falls) that have given this trail its name. We pass through forests of black oak and ponderosa pine as our trail heads relentlessly upward. There is good reason to stop and catch your breath often, as the views that unfold will leave you speechless. Enjoy lunch atop Nevada Falls, where the trail flattens out for the final mile to Little Yosemite Valley. Drop your backpack, pat yourself on the back and relax as your guide sets up camp. The remainder of the afternoon is free to spend time by the river, enjoy a nearby swimming hole, or just relax and enjoy the remarkable surroundings. Your guide will prepare a delicious dinner before settling in for the evening.
Distance/Elevation: 6.5 miles, 2000 foot ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After a good night’s rest and a hearty breakfast, we will pack up camp and continue on with our journey. Today’s hike will follow the Merced River into Lost Valley, past cascades over polished granite, into Echo Valley and up towards Merced Lake. This is certainly one of the most impressive stretches of trail in the park. We make camp along the banks of the river and then embark on short stroll to Merced Lake in the late afternoon before returning to camp for dinner.
Distance/Elevation: 7 miles backpacking + 3 miles day hiking, 1000 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After a night under the star filled sky, we pack up camp and head for the High Country. We will make our way up the ‘High Trail’ above Echo Valley and Lost Valley, 1500 feet below and formed by the Merced River. The views throughout are fantastic so keep your cameras at-the-ready. Camp will be made along Sunrise Creek.
Distance/Elevation: 7 miles, 1000 foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Donning headlamps and daypacks, we will make an early bid for the summit of Half Dome. As the day gathers light, take in the views of Basket Dome, North Dome and Clouds Rest as we work our way up Sub-Dome to the base of the cables. Here you will gain the final 400 feet to the top of Half Dome. Enjoy the 360 degree panorama stretching from El Capitan to the colorful Clark Range and everything in between. After resting and soaking in the views, we will retrace our steps back to camp. From here, we will pack up and continue on the historic John Muir Trail back to Little Yosemite Valley for the final night’s camp.
Distance/Elevation: 7 miles, 1800 foot ascent/2800 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
After another night under the star filled sky, we will enjoy one last breakfast in the wilderness before packing up camp. The route winds through beautiful forest along the opposite the side of the Merced River, affording equally stunning views as our hike up on the first day. We will arrive back at the parking area to sort through our gear before car-pooling back to Curry Village for a final lunch and fond farewells.
Distance/Elevation: 5 miles, 2000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Meet your guide at the Tuolumne Meadows Wilderness Center at 8am for a brief orientation, backpack fitting and final packing. Once we’re all ready, we’ll head off to the trailhead at Dog Lake Parking Lot and begin the hike. The trek starts out following the Tuolumne River to the junction of Rafferty Creek. Passing through open meadows, the wildflowers here can be amazing. We’ll work our way up to and over Tuolumne Pass (10,000 feet) and make our first night’s camp alongside one of the half dozen lakes surrounding Rafferty and Vogelsang peaks. Your guide will set up camp and cook the first of many delicious meals.
Distance & Elevation: 7.5 miles, 1500-foot ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We will start our morning with some fresh coffee and a yummy breakfast. Today is a layover day but we’re headed for peaks and incredible views. Vogelsang Peak, at 11,500 feet, is a non-technical summit towering above the surroundings. The route is mostly off-trail and involves a bit of scrambling but the effort is well-worth the summit views. We’ll head back down and enjoy lunch at Vogelsang Lake, followed by a second off-trail trek to a beautiful lake that seldom sees visitors. Back at camp, your guide will whip up another delicious dinner before settling in for the night.
Distance & Elevation: ~7 miles, 1500-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we head for Ireland Lake. Enjoy the sweeping views in every direction: Kuna Crest to the northeast, Mount Lyell to the south and a host of other named and unnamed ridges, lakes and peaks. We’ll skirt the shores of Evelyn Lake as we make our way across alpine meadows. Ireland Lake sits at 10,800 feet elevation and is surrounded by peaks. If time and energy permit, you might have a chance for another summit in the afternoon. Or just relax around the lake, take a dip, or simply enjoy the beautiful High Sierra.
Distance & Elevation: 5 miles + side hiking, variable elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After a night under the star-studded sky, we pack up camp and start our trek back towards lower elevations. Our trail heads east towards the 2000-foot descent into Lyell Canyon and the Pacific Crest Trail. The path is decidedly downhill, following Ireland Creek most of the way. Upon reaching the floor of Lyell Canyon, we’ll enjoy a well-earned break. We then turn north along the PCT and hike until our hearts’ content, seeking out an ideal campsite for the final night. Celebrate with a tasty lunch before parting ways.
Distance/Elevation: ~6 miles, 2000-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
Our final day continues north along the PCT back to Tuolumne Meadows. Enjoy a leisurely pace, soaking in the last of the backcountry sights and sounds. Plan to arrive back at our starting point by midday. Celebrate with a tasty lunch before parting ways. The memories will last a lifetime!
Distance/Elevation: 4 to 5 miles, 800-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch
4-Day Itinerary
The 4-Day itinerary offers all the same scenery on a more condensed schedule for those seeking a slightly shorter trip.
Day 1
This epic Yosemite hiking tour will start with the group meeting Curry Village at a predetermined time. After getting organized, we will catch a hiker shuttle to the trailhead located in the Tuolumne Meadows area. The trek starts out following the Tuolumne River to the junction of Rafferty Creek. Passing through open meadows, the wildflowers here can be amazing. We’ll work our way up to and over Tuolumne Pass (10,000 feet) and make our first night’s camp alongside one of the half dozen lakes surrounding Rafferty and Vogelsang peaks. Your guide will set up camp and cook the first of many delicious meals.
Shuttle: 2.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 7.5 miles, 1500 foot ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We will start our morning with some fresh coffee and a filling breakfast prepared by your guide. Shortly after that, we will pack up camp and get back to hiking some of Yosemite’s best alpine terrain. Within the first 2 miles, we pass the idyllic Emeric Lake. Then our trail begins to head downhill, eventually dropping 2000 feet. Enjoy views towards the Clark Range and Red Peak. Camp will be made near Merced Lake, with some time left in the afternoon to visit the lake or just kick back and relax.
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
After a fabulous night’s rest, we will pack up and continue with our journey towards Half Dome. The Merced River cascades down the granite slopes in grand fashion beyond the lake. We will make our way up the ‘High Trail’ above Echo Valley and Lost Valley, 1500 feet below and formed by the Merced River. The views throughout are fantastic so keep your cameras at-the-ready. Camp will be made along Sunrise Creek.
Distance & Elevation: 7.5 miles, ~1000 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Arise before dawn and after an early breakfast, the group will begin its trek towards Yosemite’s most famous hike: the summit of Half Dome. We will travel without backpacks. En route, we will take in views of Basket Dome, North Dome and Clouds Rest, as we work our way up Sub Dome to the base of the cables. The trail is steep and demanding but the views in the early morning are unforgettable. We will break at Sub Dome, catch our breaths, and enjoy a snack. From here, we will begin our climb up The Cables where you will gain the final 400 feet to the top of Half Dome. Enjoy the 360 degree panorama stretching from El Capitan to the colorful Clark Range and everything in between. This is a truly remarkable location to spend some time. After resting and soaking in the views, we will retrace our steps back to camp. From here we will continue on the historic John Muir Trail to the Little Yosemite Valley and the Merced River for our last night.
Distance/Elevation: 9 miles, 2000 foot ascent/ 2500 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
*Notes about climbing Half Dome- The Cable Route is not for everyone. It is extremely exposed and steep and those with a fear of heights will NOT enjoy it. However, summiting Half Dome is not required and the views from Sub Dome are also spectacular! Those choosing not to summit can wait at Sub Dome and enjoy the sights until the rest of the group returns.
Day 5
After another night under the star filled sky, we will enjoy one last breakfast in the wilderness before packing up camp. The hike out will follow the historic John Muir Trail back to the valley. This route winds through beautiful forest along the opposite the side of the Merced River, affording equally stunning views as our hike up on the first day. We will arrive back at the parking area to sort through our gear before car-pooling back to Curry Village for a final lunch and fond farewells.
Distance/Elevation: 5.5 miles/2000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
We will meet at the Curry Village Store in Yosemite Valley at 8am. After a detailed orientation and fitting of equipment, we’ll load up our packs and head out on the trail. The lower section of the trail is very popular but the steep climb quickly separates the casual walkers from hardy hikers like you. The switchbacks seem relentless but soon you are rewarded with stunning views as you gain elevation. Catch your breath in the shade, snap a few pictures and then it’s back at it. Up, up, up we go! It’s 3.5 miles to the top of the falls. Tonight’s camp is nearby and although we haven’t put in too many miles, the climb will leave you ready to drop the packs for the day. Explore the nearby surroundings while your guide sets up camp and prepares a delicious dinner.
Distance & Elevation: 5 miles, 3000 foot ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After a tasty breakfast, we’ll head out for a full day of exploring with day packs. Our goal is the top of El Capitan, one of the most imposing granite rock faces in the world. Enjoy endless fantastic views of the valley below as we work our way along the North Rim. We will return to camp after a great day of hiking and settle down for a delicious backcountry feast.
Distance & Elevation: ~10 miles, minimal ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we’ll pack up camp, cross Yosemite Creek and head on out to Yosemite Point for some breathtaking views from the rim. Then we’ll head off along the Lehamite Creek Trail towards Indian Rock and Snow Creek. The trail today is decidedly less steep than Day 1 but we’ll have a few ups and downs along the way. And away from the crowds, you’ll enjoy the peace and solitude that so enthralled John Muir. There are a few side hike opportunities today including North Dome and Indian Rock.
Distance & Elevation: 8-10 miles, 1000 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After a night under the star filled sky, we will enjoy one last breakfast in the wilderness before packing up camp. The hike back to the valley is all downhill…about 2000 feet. Once back in Yosemite Valley, we’ll hike by Mirror Lake, and then catch the shuttle back to our starting point in time for lunch.
Distance & Elevation: 5 miles, 2000 foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Meet your guide at the Tuolumne Meadows Wilderness Center at 8am for a brief orientation, backpack fitting and final packing. Once we’re all ready, we’ll head off to the trailhead and begin the hike. Our first day starts with an easy trail passing through open meadows with views of the surrounding mountains. The last couple of miles start to descend along the Tuolumne River as it begins a series of cascades on its way to Glen Aulin. Tuolumne Falls and White Cascade announce your arrival at camp. Relax while your guide sets up camp and prepares a tasty dinner.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 5.3 miles, 800-foot descent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We will start our morning with some fresh coffee and a yummy breakfast. Shortly after that, we will pack up our day packs and head out for a full day exploring the many cascades, waterfalls and plunge pools of the Grand Canyon of the Tuolumne. Highlights include California and La Conte Falls, as well as the famous Waterwheel Falls and countless unnamed cascades along the way. Bring your water sandals…many of the pools may prove unavoidably tempting for a swim! We return to camp for dinner.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 1000-foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we head for Polly Dome Lakes. We’ll strike out early to make a full day of this 8 to 10 mile day hike following the Pacific Crest Trail. Enjoy this quiet stretch of trail passing McGee Lake, small streams and surrounded by classic Yosemite granite slickrock. Polly Dome Lakes are idyllic alpine lakes at the base of the namesake Polly Dome. After enjoying lunch and possibly a dip in the lake, we will head back to Glen Aulin. Back at camp, your guide will whip up another delicious dinner before settling in for your final night in the wilderness!
Hiking Distance & Elevation: up to 10 miles, 1000-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After a final night under the star-studded sky, we pack up camp and start our trek back to Tuolumne Meadows. The path is familiar but the views on the way back seem brand new. Savor the surroundings as we head back through the meadows towards our starting point. Celebrate with a tasty lunch before parting ways.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 5.3 miles, 800-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Meet your guide at a predetermined location in Mammoth Lakes at 8am for a brief orientation, backpack fitting and final packing. Once we’re all ready, we’ll caravan to Mammoth Mountain Lodge to catch the shuttle bus to our starting trailhead at Agnew Meadows and begin the hike. Our first day starts by following the Middle Fork of the San Joaquin River up to the Shadow Creek Trail, where we’ll start a concerted climb up to Shadow Lake at nearly 8800 feet. From here, it’s a final 2 miles to our first night’s camp at Ediza Lake. Relax while your guide sets up camp and prepares a tasty dinner.
Distance/Elevation: 7.5 miles/ 1200-foot ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We will start our morning with some fresh coffee and a yummy breakfast. Shortly after that, we will head out for a nice morning stroll to nearby Iceberg Lake. Situated directly below the stunning peaks of the Minarets, Iceberg Lake offers some incredible photo opportunities. Then it’s back to camp to pack up and continue our journey over to Garnet Lake. Our route takes us along the John Muir Trail, up and over a 10,000 foot pass, and down to the shores of this most picturesque lake. We’ll set up camp and spend the rest of the day exploring the area or relaxing in our beautiful alpine surroundings.
Distance/Elevation: 5 miles + side hikes/ 1100-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we head for the namesake of our adventure: Thousand Island Lake. It’s only a few miles away and we’ll cross another 10,000-foot pass, skirt the shores of Ruby and Emerald Lakes, and descend to Thousand Island Lake. We’ll spend some time exploring the area, taking photos, and soaking up the outstanding views. Eventually, we’ll get our packs back on and head off to find a final night’s camp along the Pacific Crest Trail. Your guide will whip up another delicious dinner before settling in for your final night in the wilderness!
Distance/Elevation: ~5 miles + side hikes/~500-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
After a night under the star-studded sky, we pack up camp and start our trek back to Agnew Meadows via the High Trail. The path is decidedly downhill and the constant views are thoroughly rewarding. You’ll join back up with the John Muir Trail shortly before arriving back at the trailhead. Celebrate with a tasty lunch before parting ways. The memories will last a lifetime!
Distance/Elevation: 7.5 miles/ 1500-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Day 1
For our Sedona introduction, we’re heading to lofty heights for an unbeatable vantage point of Red Rock Country. Our goal is the summit of Wilson Mountain, 2300 feet above the surrounding high desert. The views are incredible the whole way so there are plenty of reasons to stop, catch your breath and snap some photos. Our goal is the Sedona Overlook, at 7000 feet elevation, where you will be rewarded with views that stretch over hundreds of square miles of scenic canyon country. After a delicious picnic lunch at the summit, we will slowly make our way back down to the trailhead. If time permits after the hike, we can stop in Uptown Sedona to spend some time browsing the shops and art galleries. After a great day, we’ll head to the hotel for showers and then hit the town for dinner together
Drive Time: 1 hour
Hiking Distance & Elevation: ~8miles, 2300-foot ascent/decent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
After a tasty breakfast, we will be out the door for another day of Red Rock adventuring. Today’s loop hike features spectacular views in one of the most scenic corners of Sedona. We follow the path of the old wagon trails, then ascend to a slickrock saddle high above Bear Wallow Canyon to the south and Oak Creek canyon to the north. Epic views unfold as we wind our way around Mitten Ridge and enjoy 360-degree panoramic vistas. A few sections of slickrock hiking with exposure to heights will add an element of excitement and our professional guides will offer support and guidance for those not used to slickrock hiking and you will learn how to “trust your hiking shoes”, build your confidence, and earn the rewards of this stunning landscape. We’ll then descend via the Cow Pies Trail, named for the unique sandstone rock formations along the way, and close the loop back to the starting trailhead.
Drive Time: 20 minutes
Distance & Elevation: 8.5 miles, 1100 foot descent/ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we enjoy a mix of hiking and an opportunity to visit Sedona’s renowned art and shopping district. The morning’s hike will feature a pleasant 4.5-mile loop as we circumnavigate Mescal Mountain. Enjoy the sweeping views of red rock cliffs as they give way to the towering white sandstone cliffs above. After the hike and a picnic lunch, we’ll venture to Sedona’s vibrant uptown district where you can enjoy some free time exploring beautiful Tlaquepaque (pronounced T-la-keh-pah-keh), an artist and shopping center fashioned after a traditional Mexican village. Perouse unique shops and art galleries, enjoy live music and artisan demonstrations, or sit and enjoy a glass of wine in the serene environment.
Drive Time: ~40 minutes
Distance & Elevation: 4.5 miles, 400-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
On our final day, we’ll head to one of the most iconic destinations in Sedona. Our hike begins near famous Bell Rock and crosses an undulating landscape of pinyon pine and juniper forest before ascending the sandstone benches along the eastern flank of Cathedral Rock, perhaps the single most-photographed formation in Sedona. We continue north where our trail dips down to the banks of Oak Creek, where we’ll enjoy a final lunch by the water. We then retrace our steps back to Cathedral Rock and then connect with another trail back to our starting point. At the hike’s conclusion, we’ll head back to Flagstaff for farewells, arriving around 4:00pm.
Drive Time: 1.25 hours
Distance & Elevation: ~7 miles, 600 foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Day 1
Meet your guide early for a brief orientation and then it’s off to the Needles District of Canyonlands National Park for our first hike. Our introduction to Canyonlands begins with the 7.5-mile loop through Squaw Canyon and Lost Canyon, offering slickrock vistas, quiet canyon stillness, and freshwater springs...a rare site in this otherwise dry landscape. After our hike, we will head to our secluded campsite, get set up, and settle in for the evening. Enjoy a delicious meal prepared by your guide.
Driving Time: 2 hours Hiking
Distance: 7.5 miles
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We will have an early breakfast before we head out for a full day of exploring. Today we head further into the Needles District of Canyonlands National Park to explore this area that is famous for its unique landscape of colorful sandstone spires and endless canyons. Our destination for today is Chesler Park, a beautiful, grassy expanse surrounded by colorful rock spires. If time permits and we’re feeling adventurous, we can explore the nearby Joint Trail, featuring exciting, deep crevices sometimes no more than 3 or 4 feet wide! Afterwards, we return to our camp for another delicious dinner and settle down for some well-deserved rest.
Driving Time: 20 minutes
Hiking Distance: 9 to 11 miles
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Another day of adventure and exploring! Today we head for a spectacular 150-foot high natural arch located deep in the Needles backcountry. We will trek through Elephant Canyon, a narrow canyon that features mostly flat hiking but fantastic scenery. The final quarter mile of the hike involves a steep scramble up a slope to the impressive view of our destination: Druid Arch. After some time enjoying the view and a picnic lunch, we will return the way we came.
Driving Time: 10 minutes
Hiking Distance: 11 miles
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
For our final day, we’re off to enjoy one more day of Canyonlands’ endless panoramic views and redrock hiking. The hiking opportunities are many and varied, so the day can be customized to suit the abilities and desires of the group. Adventurous hikers might enjoy the scenic Peekaboo Trail. The Slickrock Trail is a pleasant walk through the unique geology of Canyonlands and provides a wonderful overall perspective. Or fill up the day with a variety of shorter walks to ancient ruins and incredible viewpoints. Whatever the group decides, the final day will prove an amazing and fitting conclusion to your Canyon Country adventure. The group will say farewell and part ways back in Moab around 4pm.
Hiking Distance: 3-7 miles
Breakfast, Lunch
Driving Time: 2 hours
Day 1
--
Day 2
--
Day 3
--
Day 4
--
Day 1: Golden Canyon to Zabriskie Point and Gower Gulch Loop
Your adventure begins with a scenic drive from Las Vegas, where towering mountains and endless desert stretch out before you. Upon arrival in Death Valley, we’ll dive straight into one of the park’s most iconic hikes. The Golden Canyon to Red Cathedral, Zabriskie Point, and Gower Gulch Loop is the perfect introduction to this land of contrasts. The trail winds through golden-hued canyon walls, up to the stunning Red Cathedral, and then onward to the breathtaking views from Zabriskie Point, where endless badlands roll out beneath your feet. From there, we descend into the Gower Gulch, a beautiful and less-traveled path, completing this unforgettable loop. Expect colorful rock formations and dramatic landscapes at every turn.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 1,000 feet elevation gain
Drive Time: 2.5 hours from Las Vegas to Death Valley
Day 2: Wildrose Peak
Get ready for a rewarding challenge as we summit Wildrose Peak, one of the park’s most spectacular hikes. This strenuous but exhilarating trail climbs through pinyon-juniper forests, eventually leading to panoramic views from 9,064 feet. As we reach the summit, you’ll be greeted with sweeping vistas of Death Valley, the Panamint Mountains, and even views of Telescope Peak in the distance. The feeling of accomplishment as you stand above the desert expanse is unmatched, making this one of the most memorable days of the trip.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 8.4 miles, 2,200 feet elevation gain
Drive Time: 1 hour from the lodge to Wildrose Peak Trailhead
Day 3: Mesquite Flat Sand Dunes, Mosaic Canyon, & Badwater Basin
Start your morning exploring the Mesquite Flat Sand Dunes, where golden sand stretches endlessly, forming graceful, ever-shifting ridges. Wander the dunes, climb to their crests, and take in the quiet, expansive beauty.
Next, we head to Mosaic Canyon, a geological masterpiece hidden within the mountains. This moderately challenging hike takes you through narrow, polished marble passages and along unique mosaic rock formations, giving the canyon its name. The smooth walls and intricate textures are a stunning display of nature’s artistry.
To top off an extraordinary day, we visit one of the park's most famous landmarks: Badwater Basin. As the lowest point in North America, 282 feet below sea level, the salt flats here create a vast and otherworldly landscape that seems to stretch on forever. A short, easy walk provides a sharp contrast to the dunes and canyons, offering a dramatic end to a day filled with Death Valley's diverse wonders.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: Mesquite Flat Sand Dunes: up to 2 miles, minimal elevation gain; Mosaic Canyon: 4 miles, 800 feet elevation gain; Badwater Basin: 1-2 miles, minimal elevation gain
Drive Time: 30 minutes each way to Mesquite Flat and Mosaic Canyon from the lodge; 45 minutes from Mosaic Canyon to Badwater Basin
Day 4: Desolation Canyon and Farewell
Our final morning begins with a peaceful hike through Desolation Canyon, a hidden gem nestled within Death Valley’s vast wilderness. This quieter, lesser-known canyon offers a serene escape with its colorful rock layers and towering, narrow walls. As you hike through the canyon, you’ll be surrounded by vibrant geology and unique formations, making this a perfect reflective hike to close out your desert adventure.
After the hike, we embark on a scenic drive along the famous Artists Drive, a stunning 9-mile loop that showcases some of the most vibrant and colorful landscapes in Death Valley. The highlight of this drive is Artists Palette, where the hillside is painted in shades of pink, green, purple, and yellow due to the oxidation of different metals. It’s a true geological wonder and a photographer’s dream.
This scenic drive provides a memorable final experience in the park, capturing the full beauty of Death Valley’s diverse and surreal landscape. Afterward, we begin our journey back to Las Vegas, where we’ll arrive by 4 p.m., leaving you with lasting memories of this extraordinary desert adventure.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: Desolation Canyon: 3.6 miles, 600 feet elevation gain
Drive Time: 30 minutes for Artists Drive, 3 hours from Death Valley to Las Vegas
Day 1
Meet your guide at the Best Western Abbey Inn for a brief orientation at 6am. Depart St. George for the 2-hour drive to Bryce Canyon National Park. Today we explore along and beneath the rim of Bryce Canyon. We embark on a great hike that offers all that Bryce is famous for: unique rock towers (hoodoos), natural arches and windows and spectacular views. And it’s also less crowded than some of the other trails in the park. You’ll enjoy the fascinating features like the Chinese Wall, Boat Mesa and Tower Bridge. There are many ups and downs along the way making this a moderately strenuous hike but the rewards are plentiful! After our hike, we will head to our beautiful campsite near the town of Escalante.
Drive Time: 3.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 2300-foot descent / ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today we are off for a full day of exploring the secrets of the Escalante River. This beautiful redrock canyon holds endless hidden treasures. This lush oasis provides a stark contrast to the surrounding desert wilderness. Highlights include Maverick Natural Bridge, Escalante Natural Bridge, and ancient rock art. Be sure to bring your water sandals for the numerous stream crossings. After a full day of exploring, we’ll head to our comfy campsite to settle in and clean up before dinner.
Distance & Elevation: 8 to 10 miles, minimal elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today is all about desert magic and waterfall wonder. We’ll spend the day exploring the serene beauty of Calf Creek Canyon—one of the Escalante area’s true hidden gems. The trail to Lower Calf Creek Falls winds gently along the canyon floor, following the path of a crystal-clear stream. Towering sandstone walls rise on either side, streaked with ancient mineral patterns and dotted with desert varnish. Along the way, you’ll pass blooming wildflowers, groves of shady cottonwoods, and even glimpses of centuries-old rock art left behind by the Fremont people.
Our destination is the 126-foot Lower Calf Creek Falls, a spectacular cascade pouring into a shimmering pool—a true oasis in the Utah desert. It’s the perfect spot to cool your feet or take a full dip with your fellow adventurers, laugh beneath the falls, and soak in the peaceful energy of this sacred space. While you relax and unwind, your guide will prepare a nourishing, hearty lunch beneath the shade of the trees.
If the group is feeling up for more exploration, and time permits, we may venture to the Upper Calf Creek Falls, a lesser-known yet equally enchanting waterfall tucked into slickrock country above the canyon.
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Slot Canyons! Perhaps you’ve seen them in pictures, but a walk through these spectacular, narrow canyons is an experience you won’t soon forget. Beautifully carved by endless centuries of rushing water, these sandstone corridors are a magnificent display of nature’s artwork. Your guide will lead you to an off the beaten path canyon that offers quiet and solitude where we can truly embrace this wild landscape.
This is a day to try new things like rock scrambling, sliding through narrow slot canyons, or climbing around on slickrock. Options for challenging yourself and feeling a sense of empowerment and strength are bountiful.
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, 300-foot ascent / descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
On our final day, we will pack up camp and head back towards St. George. A stop in Red Canyon State Park offers a final opportunity to get out and stretch our legs in this dramatic landscape. Stunning views and quiet trails are the flavor of the day in Red Canyon, a seldom-visited jewel of Canyon Country. Your guide will choose one of many great hikes to suit the desires of the group. After lunch, we will finish up the drive back to St. George for farewells.
Distance & Elevation: ~6 miles, 300-foot ascent / descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 3.5 hours
Day 1
We’ll meet early for a warm welcome, a light breakfast, and a brief orientation to set the tone for the days ahead. Then it’s off to explore Arches National Park, where more than 2,000 natural sandstone arches stretch across the desert landscape like windows into another world. Our hike through Devil’s Garden will take us past some of the park’s most iconic formations, as we soak up the surreal beauty of this red rock wonderland and enjoy our first shared trail miles together.
After a trail-side lunch and time to take it all in, we’ll head south toward Canyonlands National Park, where adventure and solitude await. Nestled deep within the Needles District, our private group campsite will be home for the next four nights—a quiet, peaceful retreat far from the crowds, complete with fresh water, private restrooms, and plenty of space to relax.
As we settle into camp, you’ll feel the rhythm of the desert begin to work its magic. With no distractions, no rush, and a circle of supportive women around you, this is your space to breathe deeply, move mindfully, and reconnect—with yourself and the wild.
Driving Time: 2 hours
Hiking Distance: ~6 miles
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Our first morning in camp begins with the soft golden light of sunrise filtering across red rock and sagebrush. After a nourishing breakfast, we’ll pack our daypacks and hop in the van for a short drive to today’s trailhead. Our adventure is a 7.5-mile loop through Squaw Canyon and Lost Canyon—a route that weaves through sculpted sandstone, across slickrock benches, and into quiet desert canyons where the stillness feels sacred.
Along the way, we’ll encounter hidden springs and pockets of green, rare and beautiful surprises in this otherwise arid landscape. The hike is moderately challenging, offering moments to push ourselves, moments to pause, and plenty of opportunities to connect—with the land, and with each other.
After returning to our peaceful basecamp, we’ll settle in for the evening, unwind beneath the cottonwoods, and share a hearty, guide-prepared dinner around the campfire. As night falls and the stars emerge one by one across the vast desert sky, we’ll reflect on the day’s journey and the quiet strength that rises in wild places.
Hiking Distance: 7.5 miles
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
We will have an early breakfast before we head out for today’s exploration. Today we’ll hike through a landscape that feels both ancient and alive, weaving our way through a maze of sculpted canyons and open slickrock benches.
Our destination is the breathtaking Chesler Park, a wide, grassy basin surrounded by a crown of red and white sandstone pinnacles. It’s a stunning contrast to the rugged terrain we’ll pass through to get there, and it offers the perfect spot to settle in for a relaxed picnic lunch with panoramic views. Surrounded by the quiet hum of the desert and the laughter of your fellow adventurers, you’ll experience firsthand the sense of connection and peace that comes from a day immersed in wild beauty.
After retracing our steps back to camp, there’s time to unwind—stretch out beneath the shady junipers, journal, share stories, or join a gentle yoga session to soothe your body and quiet your mind. As the sun dips low, we’ll gather for a delicious guide-prepared dinner, followed by time around the campfire, where the starry skies will take center stage.
Hiking Distance: up to 7 miles
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
This is our most physically demanding hike of the trip, and also one of the most rewarding. Our destination is the awe-inspiring Druid Arch, a dramatic sandstone formation soaring 150 feet into the desert sky—tucked deep in the backcountry of the Needles District.
We’ll journey through the winding corridors of Elephant Canyon, where towering rock walls and ever-changing light create a sense of wonder with every step. Much of the hike is on relatively flat terrain, giving us time to find our rhythm and soak in the beauty around us. As we approach the final stretch, the trail climbs steeply, requiring a scramble up slickrock and stone steps—a moment to dig deep and feel your strength.
When we reach Druid Arch, the reward is unforgettable: a view that feels earned, a moment of stillness, and the shared joy of having arrived—as individuals, and as a team. We’ll relax here for a well-deserved picnic lunch beneath the arch, reflecting on the journey and the spirit that brought us here.
Afterward, we retrace our steps through the canyon, returning to camp tired, proud, and deeply fulfilled.
Hiking Distance: 11 miles
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
Our final morning in Canyonlands begins at a slower pace—no rush, no big miles to cover. Just the desert waking up around us, the warmth of shared coffee, and the quiet knowing that we’ve experienced something special together.
After breakfast, we’ll head out for a short hike on the Slickrock Trail, a beautiful walk that highlights the unique geology and sweeping vistas of the Needles District. If the group prefers, we might instead explore a few shorter trails to ancient ruins or hidden viewpoints, letting the day unfold gently, guided by curiosity and presence.
Back at camp, we’ll pack up, share a final meal, and take a few moments to breathe it all in—the strength we found, the friendships forged, and the quiet power of the desert landscape.
We’ll return to Moab by around 4:00 PM, parting ways with full hearts and a renewed sense of self—grounded, inspired, and deeply connected to the land and each other.
Distance: up to 4 miles
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Day 1
We’ll depart St. George early for a scenic drive through the heart of southern Utah, watching the desert unfold as we head toward the red rock country of Escalante. Upon arrival, we’ll go over final packing details and meet our shuttle driver, who will transport us to the starting point of our journey near the remote town of Boulder.
Once at the trailhead, we’ll shoulder our packs and take our first steps into the vast slickrock wilderness of Grand Staircase–Escalante National Monument. The route begins through a quiet forest of stunted pines before opening up to expansive sandstone terrain—a preview of the wild beauty that awaits. We’ll descend gently into the bed of Sand Creek, pausing to take in the silence and shifting scenery, before continuing across open slickrock to a dramatic overlook above Death Hollow. From there, an adventurous descent leads us into the depths of the canyon, where walls rise high above and a clear, perennial stream winds its way through the shade of tall pines.
We’ll make camp along the banks of Death Hollow, surrounded by towering cliffs and the calming sound of flowing water—a perfect spot to settle in, share a meal, and embrace the start of our journey together.
Drive Time: 4 hours
Distance & Elevation: 6 miles, 700-foot descent / ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We’ll start the day with a challenging but rewarding climb out of Death Hollow, ascending from the shaded canyon floor to the wide-open slickrock above. As we gain elevation, the landscape unfolds—sweeping views across the Death Hollow Wilderness and the high desert beyond set the tone for an inspiring day.
Our route takes us across undulating sandstone terrain toward Mamie Canyon, where we’ll drop our packs and take a short side hike to Mamie Natural Bridge—a graceful arch tucked into a quiet, hidden corner of the landscape. We’ll enjoy a well-earned lunch beneath the arch, soaking in the solitude and strength of this beautiful desert landmark.
After lunch, we’ll return to our packs and continue the journey toward Antone Flats, a stunning high-desert expanse where we’ll make camp for the night. As the sun dips low, painting the sky above the slickrock in shades of gold and rose, your guides will prepare a delicious dinner to enjoy together beneath the stars.
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 1000-foot ascent / descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
We’ll begin the day with a hearty breakfast before breaking camp and continuing our journey across the sweeping expanse of Antone Flats. A steady climb brings us to a scenic ridgeline, where we’re greeted with expansive views: Boulder Mountain rising to the north, the vastness of the Death Hollow Wilderness stretching behind us, and the town of Escalante tucked far below in the distance.
From here, we begin our descent toward Pine Creek, the terrain slowly shifting from high desert to riparian corridor. At the confluence with the Escalante River, we turn east and follow the winding path of water into the heart of a breathtaking sandstone gorge. With each bend in the canyon, the walls rise taller, creating a sense of wonder and scale that only deepens as we move forward.
Tonight’s camp is tucked beneath a towering sandstone alcove, a natural cathedral carved by time. As the light fades and echoes dance along the canyon walls, we’ll share another delicious guide-prepared dinner and reflect on how far we’ve come.
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 700-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Wake to the golden glow of sunrise as it lights up the towering canyon walls around camp—a quiet moment to sip your coffee, stretch, and soak in the serenity of this wild place. After breakfast, we’ll continue our trek downstream along the Escalante River, which flows more like a gentle stream, creating a vibrant desert oasis filled with cottonwoods, willows, and inviting swimming holes.
This stretch of canyon is rich in both natural beauty and cultural history. As we walk, we’ll pass ancient cliff dwellings and rock art panels, remnants of those who once called this place home. Desert varnish streaks the canyon walls in deep blacks and reds, adding to the striking beauty all around us.
At the confluence with Death Hollow, we’ll drop our packs and take a peaceful side hike into its lower reaches, exploring the quiet pools and sculpted rock formations one last time. From there, we’ll continue on to our final night’s camp.
As the sun sets and shadows stretch across the canyon, we’ll gather for a final shared dinner, celebrating the strength, stories, and sisterhood that have carried us through this unforgettable journey.
Distance & Elevation: 8 to 10 miles, 200-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
Our final morning on the trail begins with gratitude—for the land, the journey, and the women who shared it. We’ll hike the last few miles through the heart of the canyon, soaking in the quiet beauty of this sacred place as we make our way toward Calf Creek.
Along the way, we’ll pause beneath the striking Escalante Natural Bridge, a massive span carved by time and water, and stop to admire the Hundred Hand Panel, a powerful display of ancient rock art that reminds us we’re part of a much larger story.
We’ll celebrate the end of our journey with a final trailhead lunch, sharing reflections and favorite moments before making a quick stop in the town of Escalante. Then it’s back to St. George, with arrival expected by 5:00 PM—hearts full, legs strong, and spirits renewed by the wild beauty of southern Utah and the bonds built along the way.
Distance & Elevation: 4 miles, minimal descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 4 hours
Day 1
We depart from Flagstaff early morning for the drive to the Grand Canyon South Rim and Grandview Trailhead. We spend time learning and reviewing tips and tools for enhancing our backpacking experience and enjoy a trailside breakfast before making our initial descent into the Canyon.
We hike approximately five very rugged and steep miles down to Horseshoe Mesa and beyond to Cottonwood Creek where we enjoy a well-earned camp.
Tucked beneath the rim, the views are truly stunning, and we create opportunities for meditation and movement to help soothe achy muscles and calm our busy minds. Offering space for stillness and silence lends itself to taking it all in, with each breath and each breathtaking view.
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Distance & Elevation: 4.5 miles, 3500-foot descent
Light Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We rise, surrounded by the towering cliffs of the Canyon, eat breakfast, pack up camp, and make our way toward Hance Creek. The day is spent hiking along the beautiful Tonto Trail. Gorgeous views abound and the terrain is conducive to a more moderate pace along a landscape we often refer to as “canyon flat.” These miles are beautiful and offer our knees and other joints a bit of reprieve from the intense downhill of our first two days.
We set up camp that evening at Hance Creek, surrounded by mature Cottonwood Trees, and soak in the serenity and scenic rewards of our efforts.
Distance & Elevation: 4.4 miles, 200-foot ascent / 300-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today we wake, eat breakfast, pack up camp, and start our ascent back up to Horseshoe Mesa. This trail is rugged and wild, and we take it slow, traveling like tortoises up nearly 2,000 feet of elevation. Our camp is on the Mesa, which requires us to carry some water up with us.
Once we land, we set up camp, make dinner, and have a closing circle to round out our adventure. The views from our camp are unparalleled and we carve out plenty of time to take it all in. The night sky is phenomenal and the option to sleep without a rain fly on your tent might be just the kind of once-in-a-lifetime opportunity you never even knew you needed.
Distance & Elevation: 5 to 6 miles, 1200-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
This is our last morning down in the Canyon. We enjoy a leisurely breakfast before packing up and starting our hike back up to the top of the South Rim. We have significant elevation to gain on our hike, and we intentionally move slow and steady; a band of sisters navigating this intense and colorful landscape.
At the top, we take time to celebrate before unpacking our packs, snacking, and departing for Flagstaff. Our Grand Canyon Women’s Backpacking Adventure is truly the trip of a lifetime!
Distance & Elevation: 3 miles, 2500-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: 1.5 hours
Day 1
Our adventure begins with a scenic drive from Flagstaff, winding through the breathtaking landscapes of northern Arizona. We cross the mighty Colorado River at the historic Navajo Bridge and arrive at the trailhead for our warm-up hike.
We will embark on an exciting adventure through a stunning, narrow canyon that winds its way down to the banks of the Colorado River. The gorge grows deeper with every step, until the cliffs are several hundred feet overhead. Arriving at the banks of the river, we will pause to relax and soak in the beauty of this beautiful and remote location.
After retracing our steps, we’ll check in at our nearby lodge for the night. Once we’ve settled in, we’ll regroup for a gear check and backpacking orientation, making sure everyone feels confident and prepared for the days ahead. It’s also our chance to begin building the camaraderie and trust that make these women’s trips so powerful. We'll share dinner together at the lodge’s restaurant before heading to bed for a good night’s rest—excited for the journey to truly begin tomorrow.
Drive Time: 2 hours
Distance & Elevation: 3 miles, 500-foot descent / ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
We’ll start the day early with a nourishing breakfast and then set out on a two-hour drive to the remote north rim of the Grand Canyon, where our true backcountry adventure begins. At the trailhead, we’ll make our final gear adjustments and take a moment to absorb the vast quiet of this rarely visited corner of the canyon.
Our hike begins with a gradual descent into Upper Jumpup Canyon, following a dry creekbed through wide-open terrain framed by weathered cliffs. After about four miles, we’ll leave the wash and traverse the beautiful Esplanade, a broad sandstone bench known for its gentle slickrock hiking and sweeping desert views—a perfect introduction to the solitude and scale of this wilderness.
After a few miles, we begin a steeper descent into Sowats Canyon, where the walls begin to rise and the sense of seclusion deepens. A final mile along another dry wash brings us to a serene oasis tucked beneath cottonwoods and overhanging rock—our home for the next two nights.
Drive Time: 2 hours
Distance & Elevation: 8 miles, 1730-foot descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
Today is all about exploration and discovery, with a full-day loop hike through some of the most stunning and secluded terrain in the Kanab Creek Wilderness—carrying only light day packs as we leave camp set up.
We’ll begin by following the canyon downstream to its confluence with Lower Jumpup Canyon. Before long, the landscape shifts dramatically as we step into the breathtaking Jumpup Narrows—a deep limestone gorge where smooth, water-carved walls rise hundreds of feet above us. The sheer scale and silence of this place make it a highlight of the trip and a powerful reminder of nature’s artistry.
After soaking in the magic of the Narrows, we’ll backtrack to a beautiful side canyon where we begin a scramble up toward the Esplanade. It’s a challenging ascent, but filled with rewards—hidden pools, delicate waterfalls, and shaded alcoves offering moments to rest, refuel, and simply marvel. We’ll stop for lunch along the way, surrounded by slickrock and sky.
Once back on the Esplanade, we’ll loop around on a scenic trail that eventually leads us back down into Sowats Canyon, completing our circuit and returning to the comforts of our familiar camp. It’s a big day—physically challenging, visually stunning, and deeply fulfilling—shared with a group of women moving through wild country together, one step at a time.
Distance & Elevation: ~9 miles, ~1200-foot ascent / descent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
A new day dawns in the heart of the canyon, and with it comes a sense of calm strength and deep appreciation for the wilderness we’ve called home. After breakfast, we’ll pack up camp and begin making our way up-canyon, retracing part of our route as we move steadily back toward the rim.
Today’s hike is about four miles, with our goal being a peaceful campsite in the dry wash not far from a natural spring. Once we’ve arrived and set up camp for the final night, the afternoon is ours to enjoy. Whether you choose to wander the slickrock, explore nearby narrows, practice some gentle yoga, or simply settle into stillness with your journal or your thoughts, this is a space to savor the quiet and soak up the final hours in the backcountry.
We’ll close the day with a relaxed, shared meal under the stars—a celebration of the strength, laughter, and sisterhood that has carried us through this unforgettable journey.
Distance & Elevation: 4 miles, 400-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 5
After packing up camp one last time, we’ll set out on our final trek—a gentle 4-mile hike back to the trailhead at Jumpup Cabin. Though we covered this stretch on Day 1, the early morning light and changed perspective make it feel like a new experience.
Before the final climb to the trailhead, we’ll take time to visit a hidden spring and a set of ancient pictographs, quiet reminders of those who traveled this land long before us.
At the trailhead, we’ll enjoy a well-earned celebration lunch before loading up and beginning our drive back to Flagstaff. Expect to return by 5:00 PM at the latest, tired but fulfilled, carrying home not just memories, but a deeper connection to the wild—and to the women who shared it with you.
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 4 miles, 1400-foot ascent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: ~4 hours
Day 1
Your adventure begins with a scenic drive from Las Vegas, where towering mountains and endless desert stretch out before you. Upon arrival in Death Valley, we’ll dive straight into one of the park’s most iconic hikes. The Golden Canyon Loop is the perfect introduction to this land of contrasts. The trail winds through golden-hued canyon walls, up to the stunning Red Cathedral, and then onward to the breathtaking views from Zabriskie Point, where endless badlands roll out beneath your feet. From there, we descend into the Gower Gulch, a beautiful and less-traveled path, completing this unforgettable loop. Expect colorful rock formations and dramatic landscapes at every turn.
We’ll enjoy lunch on the trail and head toward our hotel for check-in before a delicious dinner out in Furnace Flats.
Drive Time: ~ 3 hours
Hiking Distance & Elevation: 7 miles, 1000-foot descent/ascent
Lunch, Dinner
Day 2
Today is intentionally open, offering space to respond to the group’s energy, interests, and the ever-changing mood of the desert itself. We may set out to summit the adventurous and rugged Corkscrew Peak or opt for the high-altitude challenge and sweeping views atop Wildrose Peak. For a more relaxed pace, we might explore the vibrant narrows along Artist’s Palette Drive, wander the surreal salt flats of Badwater Basin, or marvel at the intricate formations of the Devil’s Golf Course.
Whether the day calls for bold elevation gain, creative photography, or colorful canyon wandering, we’ll follow the rhythm of the group—allowing the landscape and our shared momentum to guide the way. No matter which path we choose, the experience will be rich with beauty, discovery, and adventure.
Distance & Elevation: up to 8.5 miles, 2000-foot elevation change
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 3
We start our morning with a sunrise breakfast out at Mesquite Flat Sand Dunes, where golden sand stretches endlessly, forming graceful, ever-shifting ridges. Wander the dunes, climb to their crests, and take in the quiet, expansive beauty while sipping hot drinks and enjoying a backcountry breakfast.
From there we drive out to Ubehebe Crater, an incredible geologic formation, for a 1-mile loop hike around the top of the crater where we have 360 degree panoramic views of the Cottonwood, Grapevine, and distant Gold Mountains.
We close our day in Mosaic Canyon, a geological masterpiece hidden within the mountains. This breathtaking hike takes you through narrow, polished marble passages and along unique mosaic rock formations, giving the canyon its name. There is some fun scrambling that adds to the adventurous feel of the hike. We enjoy a delicious backcountry lunch somewhere along the hike and eat dinner either in Stovepipe Wells or back at The Ranch. This day exploring the diversity that is Death Valley and is a guide-favorite!
Distance & Elevation: 6 to 8 miles, minimal elevation
Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Day 4
Our final morning begins with a hike into Desolation Canyon, a quiet and colorful gem tucked away from the more traveled parts of Death Valley. This lesser-known canyon offers a peaceful, reflective atmosphere—towering walls, swirling rock layers, and vibrant geology creating a sense of both awe and calm. It’s the perfect trail for taking it all in one last time.
At our turnaround point, we’re rewarded with sweeping views of Telescope Peak, Wildrose Peak, and the vast salt flats of Badwater Basin—a powerful visual reminder of the dramatic scale of this land and the personal journey we’ve shared. Here, we’ll take time for a brief closing circle, reflecting on what this experience has meant and what we’ll carry forward with us.
After hiking out, we begin our 3-hour drive back to Las Vegas, stopping for lunch at the historic Amargosa Opera House. Goodbyes are often filled with hugs, a few tears, and the quiet joy of having shared something truly special in the desert.
Distance & Elevation: 3.6 miles, 600-foot ascent/descent
Breakfast, Lunch
Drive Time: ~3 hours
Day 1: Arrival in Cusco – Orientation & Welcome Dinner
Arrive in the historic city of Cusco, where ancient Inca stone walls line colonial streets. After a warm airport welcome, you’ll transfer to your boutique hotel in the city center. In the evening, meet your guide and fellow travelers for an orientation and enjoy a welcome dinner at one of our favorite local restaurants.
Meals Included: Dinner Overnight: Cusco – Hotel
Day 2: Cusco City Tour – Inca Temples, Camelids & Market Life
Begin your Peru adventure with a deep dive into Cusco’s cultural and historical treasures. Visit the mighty fortress of Sacsayhuamán, marveling at its massive stone walls, followed by the sacred temples of Q’enqo. At a nearby farm, meet llamas, alpacas, guanacos, and vicuñas, and learn their importance to Andean life. After a traditional lunch, stroll through the lively San Pedro Market, filled with colors, flavors, and local traditions.
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner Overnight: Cusco – Hotel
Day 3: Sacred Valley Tour – Chinchero, Maras & Moray
Travel into the lush Sacred Valley of the Incas. Begin with a visit to Chinchero, where Andean weavers preserve centuries-old dyeing and weaving techniques. Continue to the dazzling salt terraces of Maras, cascading down the mountainside, before exploring the fascinating concentric terraces of Moray, thought to be an ancient agricultural laboratory. In the evening, settle into your hotel in the Sacred Valley to prepare for tomorrow’s trek.
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Sacred Valley – Hotel
Day 4: Short Inca Trail Trek to the Sun Gate & Machu Picchu View
Board the train from Ollantaytambo to KM 104, the starting point of the Short Inca Trail. Your trek begins with a gradual climb to the stunning ruins of Wiñayhuayna, where water still flows through ancient stone channels. From there, continue along lush, forested trails until you crest the ridge at the Sun Gate (Inti Punku) - your first breathtaking view of Machu Picchu in the afternoon light. Descend into Aguas Calientes for a hot shower, hearty dinner, and well-earned rest.
Distance: 7.4 miles
Elevation: 7,053 ft to 8,759 ft
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Aguas Calientes – Hotel
Day 5: Machu Picchu Guided Tour – Explore the Citadel
Return to Machu Picchu at sunrise to experience the citadel with fewer crowds. Wander among temples, plazas, and terraces as your guide reveals the mysteries and history of this UNESCO World Heritage Site. After a morning of exploration, board the scenic Vistadome train back to Cusco for your final evening.
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Cusco – Hotel
Day 6: Rainbow Mountain Hike
Leave Cusco early for a scenic drive through Andean villages to the trailhead at Phulawasipata (approx. 15,000 ft). Begin your trek up the slopes of Rainbow Mountain (Vinicunca), with its colorful mineral bands creating one of the most iconic vistas in Peru. After reaching the summit (over 16,000 ft), continue into the quieter and equally stunning Red Valley before returning by vehicle to Cusco. This high-altitude day hike is a challenging but unforgettable highlight of the trip.
Distance: ~5.4 miles
Elevation: 15,150 ft to 16,500 ft
Meals: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Cusco – Hotel
Day 7: Departure from Cusco – Farewell to Peru
Share one last breakfast before heartfelt farewells and airport transfers. Depart Cusco for home - or continue your travels in South America - with memories that will last a lifetime.
Meals Included: Breakfast
Day 1: Arrival in Cusco – Gateway to the Inca Trail Trek
Arrive in the storied city of Cusco, where ancient Incan stonework meets colonial charm. After a warm airport welcome and a chance to settle into your boutique hotel, you’ll gather with your guide and fellow travelers for an intimate trip briefing. The evening wraps up with a welcome dinner at one of our favorite local restaurants - the perfect start to your Peru trekking adventure.
Meals Included: Dinner
Overnight: Cusco – Hote
Day 2: Cusco City Tour – Inca Sites, Temples & Markets
Today, we step back in time as we explore the architectural marvel of Sacsayhuamán, where 120-ton stones are so perfectly placed they defy logic. Wander through the ancient temples of Q’enqo, the Temple of Mother Earth. Afterwards, we will visit a farm where we will meet the 4 varieties of the South American camel family: llamas, alpacas, guanaco, and vicunas. After a delicious lunch in Cusco, we will dive into the bustling San Pedro Market — a feast for the senses, brimming with color, tradition, and local flavor.
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Cusco – Hotel
Day 3: Sacred Valley Tour – Chinchero, Maras & Moray
Venture into the Sacred Valley of the Incas. Explore the village of Chinchero, where ancient traditions of weaving and dyeing continue today. Marvel at the surreal salt terraces of Maras, cascading down the mountainside, and learn about the Incas’ experimental agricultural site at Moray. In the evening, settle into a comfortable hotel in the Sacred Valley to prepare for the start of your Inca Trail trek.
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Sacred Valley – Hotel
Day 4: Start of the Inca Trail Trek – Sacred Valley to First Camp
The adventure begins at Km 82, the traditional starting point of the Classic Inca Trail. Follow the Urubamba River through farmland, cloud forest, and snowcapped peaks, passing hidden ruins and vibrant hummingbirds along the way. By afternoon, you’ll reach camp, greeted with warm drinks and a freshly prepared dinner. Drift off under a starlit Andean sky.
Distance: 7.4 miles
Elevation: 8,858 ft to 10,168 ft
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Camping
Day 5: Inca Trail Trek – Dead Woman’s Pass
Wake early for the most challenging, but most rewarding, day of the trek. Ascend steadily through cloud forest to Dead Woman’s Pass, the highest point on the Inca Trail at 13,776 ft. From here, the panoramic views are nothing short of spectacular. Descend into a quiet mountain valley where camp, hot soup, and rest await.
Distance: 7 miles
Elevation: 10,168 ft to 13,776 ft
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Camping
Day 6: Inca Trail Trek – Sayaqmarca Ruins & Scenic Ridge Trails
Today is both the longest and most beautiful section of the trail. Trek through mist-shrouded ridgelines and orchid-filled paths, pausing to explore ancient ruins like Sayaqmarca, perched dramatically on a cliff. End the day at one of the most scenic campsites along the Inca Trail trek, surrounded by sweeping mountain views.
Distance: 6.2 miles
Elevation: 11,975 ft to 12,959 ft
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Camping
Day 7: Sun Gate Arrival – First Glimpse of Machu Picchu
Enjoy a magical sunrise as you descend past the terraces of Wiñayhuayna, a remarkable Inca archaeological site. After a final trail lunch, bid farewell to your porter team and continue to the famed Sun Gate (Inti Punku). From here, Machu Picchu emerges in the golden afternoon light — a breathtaking reward for days of trekking. Celebrate with dinner and a hot shower in the town of Aguas Calientes.
Distance: 7.4 miles
Elevation: 12,139 ft to 7,874 ft
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Aguas Calientes – Hotel
Day 8: Machu Picchu Guided Tour – Explore the Citadel
Return to Machu Picchu at sunrise to experience the citadel with fewer crowds. Wander among temples, plazas, and terraces as your guide reveals the mysteries and history of this UNESCO World Heritage Site. After a morning of exploration, board the scenic Vistadome train back to Cusco for your final evening.
Meals Included: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner
Overnight: Cusco – Hotel
Day 9: Departure from Cusco – Farewell to Peru
Share one last breakfast before heartfelt farewells and airport transfers. Depart Cusco for home - or continue your travels in South America - with memories that will last a lifetime.
Meals Included: Breakfast
Details
What's Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Rountrip Transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- Park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Utah will accommodate 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
Is this trip for me?
This is a backpacking trip. Backpacking trips are strenuous endeavors and the decision to join one of these trips should not be taken lightly. It is intended for active people who exercise regularly, maintain a healthy weight, and do not have any chronic knee issues. You will be carrying a tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, all of your personal clothing/toiletries/gear, up to 3 liters of water at a time, and a share of the group food. Every participant must be able to comfortably manage a 35-pound backpack each day while hiking for 6 to 8 hours, on steep canyon trails, descending more than 4000 feet or ascending 3000 feet. The descent into Grand Canyon is perhaps the most challenging part of the hike and the physical demands of downhill hiking is often underestimated. It is each participant’s responsibility to ensure they possess the level of physical fitness required to complete the hike. Do not take this lightly or fail to properly prepare for the hike. If you are not already a very active person in excellent health, then you are encouraged to consider a different trip style.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
Is this trip for me?
This is a backpacking trip. Backpacking trips are strenuous endeavors and the decision to join one of these trips should not be taken lightly. It is intended for active people who exercise regularly, maintain a healthy weight, and do not have any chronic knee issues. You will be carrying a tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, all of your personal clothing/toiletries/gear, up to 3 liters of water at a time, and a share of the group food. Every participant must be able to comfortably manage a 35 to 40-pound backpack each day while hiking for 6 to 8 hours, on steep canyon trails, descending or ascending 4800 feet in a single day. The descent into Grand Canyon is perhaps the most challenging part of the hike and the physical demands of downhill hiking is often underestimated. It is each participant’s responsibility to ensure they possess the level of physical fitness required to complete the hike. Do not take this lightly or fail to properly prepare for the hike. If you are not already a very active person in excellent health, then you are encouraged to consider a different trip style.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles, microspikes
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% NPS Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-15% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-15% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Lodge accommodations Night 1
- All necessary gear: day pack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All necessary cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and camping permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on mixed-group trips. This restriction is negotiable on private tours or family-specific departures. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
Is this trip for me?
This hike is rated Intermediate Plus. It is intended for active people who exercise regularly, maintain a healthy weight, and do not have any chronic knee issues. Though mules will carry all of the camping gear, that does not mean that this is an easy Grand Canyon hike. It is a strenuous endeavor and the decision to join one of these trips should not be taken lightly. Each participant must be able to comfortably manage an approximately 20-pound backpack while hiking for 7 to 9 hours on steep canyon trails, descending or ascending more than 4500 feet in a single day. The descent into Grand Canyon is perhaps the most challenging part of the hike and the physical demands of downhill hiking is often underestimated.
It is each participant’s responsibility to ensure they possess the level of physical fitness required to complete the hike. Do not take this lightly or fail to properly prepare for the hike. If you are not already a very active person in excellent health, then you are encouraged to consider a different trip style.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
- Duffel service for tents, sleeping bags, sleeping pads, group gear and food to be carried by the mules. Participants only carry personal clothing/items.
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Grand Canyon, South Rim
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most camping trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, trekking poles, traction devices (for icy conditions)
- Accommodations at Phantom Ranch in shared, mix-gender cabin with bunk beds
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Grand Canyon's South Rim
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
This trip can accommodate up to 9 participants with 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $500 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: day pack, trekking poles, traction devices (for icy conditions)
- Three nights lodge accommodations in Marble Canyon
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ
- Park entrance fees
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will accommodate 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on scheduled departures. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours or other existing departures with children. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: day pack, trekking poles, traction devices (for icy conditions)
- Three nights lodge accommodations in Marble Canyon
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ
- Park entrance fees
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most hiking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: day pack, trekking poles, traction devices (for icy conditions)
- Three nights lodge accommodations in Grand Canyon and Sedona
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ
- Park Entrance Fees
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
Lodging the night before/after the trip
Clothing, raingear, and footwear
Personal toiletries, sunscreen
Water bottles/hydration bladder
Headlamp or flashlight
Guide gratuity (suggested 10-15% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
This tour will generally accommodate 6 people plus one guide. But please contact us if you might have a larger group size.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- 3 nights lodge accommodations
- Use of day pack and trekking poles
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ
- All park entrance fees
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled tours. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- All meals from lunch on the first day through lunch on the last day + trail snacks.
- Use of day pack and trekking poles
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- All backcountry permits & park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 15% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Utah will accommodate 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: day pack, trekking poles, traction devices (for icy conditions)
- Two nights lodge accommodations at Grand Canyon’s South Rim
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ
- Park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on scheduled trips. This restriction is negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
A professional, knowledgeable, local guide licensed by Grand Canyon National Park, delicious picnic lunch, trail snacks, day packs, and trekking poles.
How long does a day hike last?
Expect to spend about 5 to 6 hours with your guide.
Reserving A Tour
To make a reservation, visit our Reservation Request page. Or call our office at 928-525-1552, Monday to Friday, 9am to 4pm AZ time.
Cancellations
To guarantee your day hike reservation, we require a full payment. A $100 cancellation fee will be assessed for all cancellations greater than 7 days in advance of your scheduled hike. Between 7 days and 72 hours, cancellations will incur a 50% fee. Within 72 hours of the hike departing, cancellations will receive no refunds. There are no refunds for guests who arrive late or depart early from the hike.
What is included?
A professional, knowledgeable, local guide licensed by Grand Canyon National Park, delicious picnic lunch, trail snacks, day packs, and trekking poles.
How long does a day hike last?
Expect to spend about 5 to 6 hours with your guide.
Reserving A Tour
To make a reservation, visit our Reservation Request page. Or call our office at 928-525-1552, Monday to Friday, 9am to 4pm AZ time.
Cancellations
To guarantee your day hike reservation, we require a full payment. A $100 cancellation fee will be assessed for all cancellations greater than 7 days in advance of your scheduled hike. Between 7 days and 72 hours, cancellations will incur a 50% fee. Within 72 hours of the hike departing, cancellations will receive no refunds. There are no refunds for guests who arrive late or depart early from the hike.
What is included?
A professional, knowledgeable, local guide licensed by Grand Canyon National Park, delicious picnic lunch, trail snacks, day packs, and trekking poles.
How long does a day hike last?
Expect to spend about 5 to 6 hours with your guide.
Reserving A Tour
To make a reservation, visit our Reservation Request page. Or call our office at 928-525-1552, Monday to Friday, 9am to 4pm AZ time.
Cancellations
To guarantee your day hike reservation, we require a full payment. A $100 cancellation fee will be assessed for all cancellations greater than 7 days in advance of your scheduled hike. Between 7 days and 72 hours, cancellations will incur a 50% fee. Within 72 hours of the hike departing, cancellations will receive no refunds. There are no refunds for guests who arrive late or depart early from the hike.
What is included?
A professional, knowledgeable, local guide licensed by Grand Canyon National Park, delicious picnic lunch, trail snacks, day packs, and trekking poles.
How long does a day hike last?
Expect to spend about 5 to 6 hours with your guide.
Reserving A Tour
To make a reservation, visit our Reservation Request page. Or call our office at 928-525-1552, Monday to Friday, 9am to 4pm AZ time.
Cancellations
To guarantee your day hike reservation, we require a full payment. A $100 cancellation fee will be assessed for all cancellations greater than 7 days in advance of your scheduled hike. Between 7 days and 72 hours, cancellations will incur a 50% fee. Within 72 hours of the hike departing, cancellations will receive no refunds. There are no refunds for guests who arrive late or depart early from the hike.
-
-
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT to trailhead
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Utah will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT to trailhead
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Utah will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT to trailhead
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most backpacking trips in Utah will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to trailhead.
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Backpacking trips in Grand Gulch will accommodate up to 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Lodge accommodations (double occupancy) in Zion
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Rountrip Transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- Entrance fees, camping fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will consist of 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Rountrip Transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- Entrance fees, camping fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will consist of 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip Transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- Park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will consist of 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Rountrip Transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- Park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will consist of 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Rountrip Transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- Park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will consist of 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- All breakfasts & lunches through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Use of day pack and trekking poles
- Rountrip Transportation to parks and trailheads for each day of the trip
- All backcountry permits & park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Moab, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Dinners – there are many restaurants in Moab within easy walking distance
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will consist of 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Rountrip Transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- Park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will consist of 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
- 5% NPS Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Yosemite National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Yosemite will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 12 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
- 5% NPS Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Yosemite National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested about 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Yosemite will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 12 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
- 5% NPS Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Yosemite National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Yosemite will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 12 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
- 5% NPS Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Yosemite National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Yosemite will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 12 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested ~15% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with a registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, AmEx, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
- 5% NPS Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Yosemite National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Yosemite will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 12 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
- 5% NPS Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Yosemite National Park)
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Yosemite will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 12 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested ~15% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with a registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, AmEx, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Backcountry permits and fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Yosemite National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Yosemite will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 12 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What is included?
Transportation to and from the trailhead from your Sedona hotel/accommodation, delicious picnic lunch, trail snacks, use of day packs and trekking poles, and a knowledgeable, local guide licensed by the US Forest Service.
Reserving A Tour
To make a reservation, visit our Reservation Request page. Or call our office at 928-525-1552, Monday to Friday, 9am to 4pm AZ time.
Cancellations
To guarantee your day hike reservation, we require full payment. A $100 cancellation fee will be assessed for all cancellations greater than 7 days in advance of your scheduled hike. Between 7 days and 72 hours, cancellations will incur a 50% fee. Within 72 hours of the hike departing, cancellations will receive no refunds. There are no refunds for guests who arrive late or depart early from the hike.
What is included?
Transportation to and from the trailhead from your Sedona hotel/accommodation, delicious picnic lunch, trail snacks, use of day packs and trekking poles, and a knowledgeable, local guide licensed by the US Forest Service.
Reserving A Tour
To make a reservation, visit our Reservation Request page. Or call our office at 928-525-1552, Monday to Friday, 9am to 4pm AZ time.
Cancellations
To guarantee your day hike reservation, we require full payment. A $100 cancellation fee will be assessed for all cancellations greater than 7 days in advance of your scheduled hike. Between 7 days and 72 hours, cancellations will incur a 50% fee. Within 72 hours of the hike departing, cancellations will receive no refunds. There are no refunds for guests who arrive late or depart early from the hike.
What is included?
Transportation to and from the trailhead from your Sedona hotel/accommodation, delicious picnic lunch, trail snacks, use of day packs and trekking poles, and a knowledgeable, local guide licensed by the US Forest Service.
Reserving A Tour
To make a reservation, visit our Reservation Request page. Or call our office at 928-525-1552, Monday to Friday, 9am to 4pm AZ time.
Cancellations
To guarantee your day hike reservation, we require full payment. A $100 cancellation fee will be assessed for all cancellations greater than 7 days in advance of your scheduled hike. Between 7 days and 72 hours, cancellations will incur a 50% fee. Within 72 hours of the hike departing, cancellations will receive no refunds. There are no refunds for guests who arrive late or depart early from the hike.
What is included?
Transportation to and from the trailhead from your Sedona hotel/accommodation, delicious picnic lunch, trail snacks, use of day packs and trekking poles, and a knowledgeable, local guide licensed by the US Forest Service.
Reserving A Tour
To make a reservation, visit our Reservation Request page. Or call our office at 928-525-1552, Monday to Friday, 9am to 4pm AZ time.
Cancellations
To guarantee your day hike reservation, we require full payment. A $100 cancellation fee will be assessed for all cancellations greater than 7 days in advance of your scheduled hike. Between 7 days and 72 hours, cancellations will incur a 50% fee. Within 72 hours of the hike departing, cancellations will receive no refunds. There are no refunds for guests who arrive late or depart early from the hike.
What's Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip Transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ
- Land Use fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
This tour will generally accommodate 6 people plus one guide. But please contact us if you might have a larger group size.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Canyonlands National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Backpacking trips in Canyonlands will accommodate up to 6 people plus one guide.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Moab, UT
- Park entrance fees and camping permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Moab, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested ~15% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips will accommodate 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
--
What's Not Included
--
How Many People Are in The Group
--
Are There Age Restrictions?
--
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Las Vegas, NV
- Park entrance fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Las Vegas, NV
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested ~15% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group
Most trips in Death Valley will accommodate 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What’s Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Rountrip Transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT
- Entrance fees, camping fees and backcountry permits
What’s Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are In the Group?
Most trips will consist of 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Our All Women’s Adventures are intended for adults 18 years of age or older.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What’s Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Moab, UT
- Park entrance fees and camping permits
What’s Not Included
- Transportation to/from Canyonlands National Park
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People are In the Group?
Most trips will accommodate 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Our All Women’s Adventures are intended for adults 18 years of age or older.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What’s Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT to trailhead
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
What’s Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People are In the Group?
Most backpacking trips in Utah will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Our All Women’s Adventures are intended for adults 18 years of age or older.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What’s Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What’s Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People are In the Group?
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Our All Women’s Adventures are intended for adults 18 years of age or older.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What’s Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ to Grand Canyon
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
- 5% National Park Service Commercial Fee (a required fee that passes through to Grand Canyon National Park)
What’s Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People are In the Group?
Most backpacking trips in Grand Canyon will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 9 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Our All Women’s Adventures are intended for adults 18 years of age or older.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What’s Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in Las Vegas, NV
- Park entrance fees
What’s Not Included
- Transportation to/from Las Vegas, NV
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested ~15% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People are In the Group?
Most trips in Death Valley will accommodate 6 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Our All Women’s Adventures are intended for adults 18 years of age or older.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- All lodging (double occupancy) for the duration of the trip.
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- Use of day pack & trekking poles
- All meals from lunch on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip Transportation from your hotel in Flagstaff, AZ
- Land Use fees
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from Flagstaff, AZ
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon Booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group?
This tour will generally accommodate 6 people plus one guide. But please contact us if you might have a larger group size.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 12 are generally not permitted on regularly scheduled trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
What's Included
- A professional, licensed and medically trained guide
- All necessary gear: backpack, tent, sleeping bag, sleeping pad, trekking poles
- All cooking/eating gear: bowls, cups, utensils (your guide will prepare all meals)
- All meals from a light breakfast on Day 1 through lunch on the last day + trail snacks
- Roundtrip transportation from your hotel in St. George, UT to trailhead
- Entrance fees and backcountry permits
What's Not Included
- Transportation to/from St. George, UT
- Lodging the night before/after the trip
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (suggested 10-20% of trip cost)
*Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet
How Many People Are in The Group?
Most backpacking trips in Utah will accommodate 5 people plus one guide. On occasion, a group may be as large as 10 people plus 2 guides.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Children under the age of 13 are generally not permitted on backpacking trips. This restriction may be negotiable on private tours. Please contact us with any questions regarding this policy.
How Do I Sign Up?
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $250 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
Is This Trip Right for Me?
The Machu Picchu Lodge-Based Trek is less strenuous than the full Inca Trail, but still an active adventure at altitude. You’ll spend time in Cusco (~11,000 ft / 3,350 m) and the Sacred Valley, where even light activity can feel more challenging due to thinner air.
The highlight is the Short Inca Trail trek (KM 104), a one-day hike (~7 miles / 11 km) that includes gradual climbing, visits to Wiñayhuayna, and an unforgettable first view of Machu Picchu from the Sun Gate. It’s moderately demanding but accessible to most active travelers.
Another feature is the Rainbow Mountain hike (~16,500 ft / 5,030 m). Although it’s only a day hike, the high altitude makes it a challenge and requires good fitness and acclimatization.
This trip is right for you if you:
- Enjoy active days of sightseeing and hiking but prefer to return to comfortable lodges and boutique hotels at night.
- Want a taste of the Inca Trail without committing to four days of camping and rugged ascents.
- Are excited by the combination of culture, history, and one unforgettable high-altitude day hike.
Looking for something a little more adventurous?
If you’re craving a tougher challenge with longer days on the trail and the classic experience of a trekking and camping adventure, our Inca Trail Trek to Machu Picchu might be the better fit.
What’s Included
- Inca Trail permits and Machu Picchu Entrance tickets
- Airport transfers between Cusco Airport and Cusco hotel
- Private transportation provided for duration of trip
- Experienced, licensed, and medically-trained guides with extensive experience leading Inca Trail hikes and Machu Picchu tours
- All meals from dinner on the first day through breakfast on the last day
- Tickets for train ride from Ollantaytambo to trailhead and returning from Aguas Calientes to Cusco
- All lodging for duration of trip (6 nights)
- All necessary hiking gear: backpacks, trekking poles, etc.
- Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet with packing list, travel guidance, and training information for how to properly prepare for this adventure
What’s Not Included
- Flights to and from Cusco, Peru
- Trip Insurance (essential for international trips)
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Guide gratuity (Suggested 15% of trip cost)
How Many People In Group
Our Peru trekking tours can accommodate up to 12 people but will operate with as few as 2 people. Larger groups can occasionally be accommodated. Please contact us for details.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Participants must be 12 years of age or older.
How Do I Sign Up
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $300 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
Is This Trip Right for Me?
The Inca Trail Trek to Machu Picchu is a strenuous, high-altitude adventure. Over four consecutive trekking days, you’ll cover roughly 30 miles while ascending and descending thousands of stone steps built by the Incas centuries ago. The most demanding section is Dead Woman’s Pass (13,776 ft / 4,200 m), which involves a steep, sustained climb followed by a long descent. Other days also include challenging ascents, rugged downhill sections, and full days on your feet.
Altitude is a major factor. You’ll spend much of the trip above 10,000 ft (3,000 m), beginning in Cusco and peaking near 14,000 ft. Even well-prepared hikers often find that thin air magnifies the difficulty of the climbs. To enjoy this trek, it’s essential to be in excellent physical condition, train ahead of time, and allow for acclimatization.
This trip is right for you if you:
- Have strong trekking experience or are very physically fit.
- Are comfortable carrying a daypack with water, clothing, and personal items for 6–8 hours of hiking each day.
- Embrace the challenge of high-altitude mountain passes and camping under the stars.
Does this sound too strenuous? Not a fan of camping?
If the physical demands or camping aspect don’t feel like the right fit, you may want to consider our Machu Picchu Lodge-Based Trek with the Short Inca Trail & Rainbow Mountain. It includes cultural exploration, hiking at altitude, and Machu Picchu - but with comfortable lodge accommodations every night instead of multi-day camping and without the long, difficult passes.
What’s Included
- Inca Trail permits and Machu Picchu Entrance tickets
- Airport transfers between Cusco Airport and Cusco hotel
- Private transportation provided for duration of trip
- Experienced and medically-trained guides with over 500 trips on the Inca Trail
- All meals from dinner on the first day through breakfast on the last day
- Train tickets for Vistadome Train ride from Aguas Caliente to Ollantaytambo
- All hotel and camping/lodging for duration of trip (5 nights lodging / 3 nights camping)
- All necessary gear: backpacks, tents, sleeping bags, sleeping pads, trekking poles, and a duffel bag for you to pack your personal items to be transported by the team of porters
- Porters who will be responsible for transportation of all food, gear and up to 8 pounds of your personal items.
- Gratuity for Porters, Chefs, Waiters, and Drivers. *Please Note: Gratuities for Guide(s) are not included in trip rate.
- Upon booking you will receive a detailed trip information packet with packing list, travel guidance, and training information for how to properly prepare for this adventure
What’s Not Included
- Flights to and from Cusco, Peru
- Trip Insurance (essential for international trips)
- Clothing, raingear, and footwear
- Personal toiletries, sunscreen
- Water bottles/hydration bladder
- Headlamp or flashlight
- Guide gratuity (Suggested 15% of trip cost)
How Many People In Group
Our Peru trekking tours can accommodate up to 12 people but will operate with as few as 2 people. Larger groups can occasionally be accommodated. Please contact us for details.
Are There Age Restrictions?
Participants must be 12 years of age or older.
How Do I Sign Up
In order to confirm a reservation, we require an initial deposit of $300 per person, with the final balance due 90 days prior to the trip’s departure. If you book a trip within 90 days of the trip’s scheduled departure, then full payment is due at the time of booking.
Once we confirm availability, you will be provided with an online registration link. Your deposit is payable online by Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, or ACH transfer.
Travel Logistics
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 7am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 7am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What should you bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3 liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 7am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff. Please visit our Travel Resources page for information on airports, shuttles/rental cars and recommended hotels.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:30pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Embassy Suites hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Embassy Suites (recommended) or Hampton Inn & Suites can leave their cars at the hotel. These hotels will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Grand Canyon Village at the South Rim of Grand Canyon National Park and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure here. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (3.5 hour drive) or Flagstaff (1.5 hour drive).
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 5:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Maswik Lodge in Grand Canyon Village. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 5:30am and 7:30am.
What Will the Mules Carry? What will I Carry?
The mules will carry your tent, sleeping bag, air mattress, all group kitchen/eating gear and food. Each person is expected to carry up to 15 pounds. This will include 3 liters of water (~ 6 pounds) and all personal clothing/items. The weight you carry is largely dependent on how much personal clothing/items you bring.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
On the morning of your hike’s departure, the group will meet at the Backcountry Information Center at a predetermined time. There is a large, long-term parking area here where you can leave your car. Most guests leave their extra luggage in their car during the hike. However, feel free to discuss luggage storage options with your hotel. They are often willing to accommodate you, especially if you will be spending an additional night there after the hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back on the South Rim by 4pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Some trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Grand Canyon Village at the South Rim of Grand Canyon National Park and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure here. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (3.5 hour drive) or Flagstaff (1.5 hour drive).
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 5:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Maswik Lodge in Grand Canyon Village. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 5:30am and 7:30am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
On the morning of your hike’s departure, the group will meet at the Backcountry Information Center at a predetermined time. There is a large, long-term parking area here where you can leave your car. Most guests leave their extra luggage in their car during the hike. However, feel free to discuss luggage storage options with your hotel. They are often willing to accommodate you, especially if you will be spending an additional night there after the hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back on the South Rim by 4pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Some trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
Your guide will pick you up at your Flagstaff hotel the morning of your trip’s scheduled departure, at a pre-determined time. Most trips depart between 6am and 8am. We strongly recommend staying at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff the night prior to departure, where we have arranged discounted rates for our guests.
You will receive an orientation email approximately 5 days pror to your trip’s departure with last-minute details and helpful information.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
Your guide will pick you up at your Flagstaff hotel the morning of your trip’s scheduled departure, at a pre-determined time. Most trips depart between 6am and 8am. We strongly recommend staying at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff the night prior to departure, where we have arranged discounted rates for our guests.
You will receive an orientation email approximately 5 days pror to your trip’s departure with last-minute details and helpful information.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotels will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
Your guide will pick you up at your Flagstaff hotel the morning of your trip’s scheduled departure, at a pre-determined time. Most trips depart between 6am and 8am. We strongly recommend staying at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff the night prior to departure, where we have arranged discounted rates for our guests.
You will receive an orientation email approximately 5 days pror to your trip’s departure with last-minute details and helpful information.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotels will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
Your guide will pick you up at your Flagstaff hotel the morning of your trip’s scheduled departure, at a pre-determined time. Most trips depart between 6am and 8am. We strongly recommend staying at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff the night prior to departure, where we have arranged discounted rates for our guests.
You will receive an orientation email approximately 5 days pror to your trip’s departure with last-minute details and helpful information.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotels will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
Your guide will pick you up at your Flagstaff hotel the morning of your trip’s scheduled departure, at a pre-determined time. Most trips depart between 6am and 8am. We strongly recommend staying at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff the night prior to departure, where we have arranged discounted rates for our guests.
You will receive an orientation email approximately 5 days prior to your trip’s departure with last-minute details and helpful information.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Meeting Time & Place
You will meet your guide at the Grand Canyon Visitor Center inside the park. The exact location will be arranged upon booking your reservation. Meeting times are largely dependent on time of year, though typically about 8am (October through April) or 6am (May through September).
What should you bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3 liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.What should you bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3 liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.Meeting Time & Place
You will meet your guide at the Grand Canyon Visitor Center inside the park. The exact location will be arranged upon booking your reservation. Meeting times are largely dependent on time of year, though typically about 8am (November through March) or 7am (April, May, September). This hike is not recommended in June through August.
What should you bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3 liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.Meeting Time & Place
You will meet your guide at the Backcountry Information Center inside the park. The exact location will be arranged upon booking your reservation. Meeting times are largely dependent on time of year, though typically about 8am (October through April) or 7am (May through September).
What should you bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3 liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.-
-
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 7:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between by 6:30am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 7:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between by 6:30am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end at the Needles Visitor Center in Canyonlands National Park (about 1.5 hour drive from Moab). You will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Moab . You will want to fly into either Grand Junction, CO (2 hour drive) or Salt Lake City, UT (4 hour drive). Boutique Air offers daily flights between Moab and both Salt Lake City, UT and Denver, CO.
Where do meet our guides?
You will meet your guide at the Needles Visitor Center (about 1.5 hour drive from Moab) at 8am the morning your hike begins. We will distribute gear and load backpacks here before boarding a shuttle to the trailhead.
We will go over logistics for the hike, expected weather (and how this might affect what clothing you bring…or leave behind), food, and answer any last minute questions. We will also use this time to fit everyone for their backpacks.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
You can leave your car at Squaw Flat at our ending trailhead. Your guide will lead you to this point after everyone is packed up. It is a short drive from the Visitor Center.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back at the ending trailhead by 1pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. After lunch and unpacking/gear breakdown, you will be free to depart. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotels will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Moab, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Moab. You will want to fly into either Grand Junction (2 hour drive), Salt Lake City (4 hour drive) or Moab.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 7:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Greenwell Inn in Moab. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure. After a brief orientation, we will depart for the first day of hiking.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We stay at the Best Western Greenwell Inn for the duration of the trip so it is convenient for you to stay here the night prior to your trip’s scheduled start date. For an additional fee, we can arrange this night’s accommodation as well. If you choose to stay at another location the night prior to your trip’s scheduled start date, then just plan to meet us at the Greenwell Inn at 7:00am on Day 1.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Moab by 4pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
You will meet your guide at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George at 6am the morning your trip departs. The hotel breakfast starts at this time and we will eat together and have a brief orientation. We will go over the itinerary, expected weather (and how this might affect what clothing you bring…or leave behind), food, and answer any last-minute questions. We will also hand out day packs for anyone who needs them.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We can pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars here and the hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to arrive back in St. George by about 5pm on the last day. In general, we tend to discourage trying to book flights on the same day your trip ends.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in in Yosemite National Park. You will want to fly into San Francisco, Oakland, Sacramento, Fresno, or Reno. You will need to arrange your own transportation from airports to the park. In most cases, renting a car is your easiest and best option.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 5:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the at a pre-arranged location inside the park. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 7am and 9am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
On the first morning of your trip, you will follow your guide to the long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 2pm. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Yosemite National Park. You will want to fly into San Francisco, Oakland, Sacramento, Fresno, or Reno. You will need to arrange your own transportation from airports to the park. In most cases, renting a car is your easiest and best option.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 5:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the at a pre-arranged location inside the park. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 7am and 9am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
On the first morning of your trip, you will follow your guide to the long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 2pm. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Yosemite National Park. You will want to fly into San Francisco, Oakland, Sacramento, Fresno, or Reno. You will need to arrange your own transportation from airports to the park. In most cases, renting a car is your easiest and best option.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 5:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the at a pre-arranged location inside the park. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 7am and 9am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
On the first morning of your trip, you will follow your guide to the long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 2pm. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Yosemite National Park. You will want to fly into San Francisco, Oakland, Sacramento, Fresno, or Reno. You will need to arrange your own transportation from airports to the park. In most cases, renting a car is your easiest and best option.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 5:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the at a pre-arranged location inside the park. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 7am and 9am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
On the first morning of your trip, you will follow your guide to the long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 2pm. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Tuolumne Meadows, Yosemite National Park. You will want to fly into San Francisco, Oakland, Sacramento, Fresno, or Reno. You will need to arrange your own transportation to the park. In most cases, renting a car is your easiest and best option.
Where do meet our guides?
You will meet your guide at the Tuolumne Wilderness Center at 8:00am the morning your hike begins. We will distribute all gear and pack up before heading off on the trail.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
The Tuolumne Wilderness Center has a long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 2pm. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Yosemite National Park. You will want to fly into San Francisco, Oakland, Sacramento, Fresno, or Reno. You will need to arrange your own transportation from airports to the park. In most cases, renting a car is your easiest and best option.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 5:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the at a pre-arranged location inside the park. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 7am and 9am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
On the first morning of your trip, you will follow your guide to the long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 2pm. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Yosemite National Park. You will want to fly into San Francisco, Oakland, Sacramento, Fresno, or Reno. You will need to arrange your own transportation from airports to the park. In most cases, renting a car is your easiest and best option.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 5:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the at a pre-arranged location inside the park. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between 7am and 9am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
On the first morning of your trip, you will follow your guide to the long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 2pm. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Tuolumne Meadows, Yosemite National Park. You will want to fly into San Francisco, Oakland, Sacramento, Fresno, or Reno. You will need to arrange your own transportation to the park. In most cases, renting a car is your easiest and best option.
Where do meet our guides?
You will meet your guide at the Tuolumne Wilderness Center at 8:00am the morning your hike begins. We will distribute all gear and pack up before heading off on the trail.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
The Tuolumne Wilderness Center has a long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 2pm. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Mammoth Lakes, California. United Airlines offers connecting flights into Eastern Sierra Regional Airport in Bishop (BIH), just 45 minutes south of Mammoth Lakes, via Los Angeles, San Francisco, and Denver. Or you can fly into Reno, Los Angeles, Fresno, Sacramento and rent a car. Reno is the closest major airport and is still a 3-hour drive from Mammoth Lakes.
Where do meet our guides?
You will meet your guide at a pre-determined location in Mammoth Lakes at 8am the morning your hike begins. We will distribute all gear and pack up before heading off on the trail.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
The Mammoth Mountain Adventure Center (where we’ll catch the shuttle bus to the trailhead) has a long-term parking area where you can leave your car and personal belongings for the duration of the hike. You can also check with your hotel to see if they are willing to store your luggage for you while you hike.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Most trips end at lunchtime on the last day of the trip. If you are considering flying home on the last day of the trip, you should be finished up around 3pm. But in general, we tend to discourage trying to book flights on the same day your trip ends.
Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Meeting Time & Place
We are happy to pick you up at your hotel or accommodation in Sedona. Our meeting time will be arranged upon booking your reservation and is largely dependent on time of year. For most hikes, we strongly recommend early start times to ensure parking at popular trailheads.
What Should You Bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3-liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.
Meeting Time & Place
We are happy to pick you up at your hotel or accommodation in Sedona. Our meeting time will be arranged upon booking your reservation and is largely dependent on time of year. For most hikes, we strongly recommend early start times to ensure parking at popular trailheads.
What Should You Bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3-liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.
Meeting Time & Place
We are happy to pick you up at your hotel or accommodation in Sedona. Our meeting time will be arranged upon booking your reservation and is largely dependent on time of year. For most hikes, we strongly recommend early start times to ensure parking at popular trailheads.
What Should You Bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3-liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.
Meeting Time & Place
We are happy to pick you up at your hotel or accommodation in Sedona. Our meeting time will be arranged upon booking your reservation and is largely dependent on time of year. For most hikes, we strongly recommend early start times to ensure parking at popular trailheads.
What Should You Bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3-liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 7:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Moab, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Moab. You will want to fly into either Grand Junction (2 hour drive), Salt Lake City (4 hour drive) or Moab.
Where do we meet our guides?
You will meet your guide at the specified hotel at 6:30am the morning your trip departs. The hotel breakfast starts at this time and we will eat together and have a brief orientation. We will go over the itinerary, expected weather (and how this might affect what clothing you bring…or leave behind), food, and answer any last-minute questions. We will also hand out day packs for anyone who needs them.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Moab by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
--
Where do meet our guides?
--
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
--
What time will we get back on the last day?
--
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Las Vegas, NV and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Las Vegas. You will want to fly into Harry Reid International Airport (formerly McCarran Airport) and shuttle services are available throughout Las Vegas.
Where do meet our guides?
Your guide will pick you up at your Las Vegas hotel the morning of your trip’s scheduled departure, at a pre-determined time. Most trips depart between 6:00am and 8:00am. We strongly recommend staying at the Tuscany Suites & Casino the night prior to departure, where we have arranged discounted rates for our guests.
You will receive an orientation email approximately 5 days prior to your trip’s departure with last-minute details and helpful information.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Las Vegas and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Tuscany Suites & Casino (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel, as long as you have booked accommodations for the night prior to the trip’s departure and the night of the trip’s conclusion. The hotel cannot store any extra luggage for you so you will want to plan accordingly.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Las Vegas by 4:00pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Las Vegas, NV and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Las Vegas. You will want to fly into Harry Reid International Airport (formerly McCarran Airport) and shuttle services are available throughout Las Vegas.
Where do meet our guides?
Your guide will pick you up at your Las Vegas hotel the morning of your trip’s scheduled departure, at a pre-determined time. Most trips depart between 6:00am and 8:00am. We strongly recommend staying at the Tuscany Suites & Casino the night prior to departure, where we have arranged discounted rates for our guests.
You will receive an orientation email approximately 5 days prior to your trip’s departure with last-minute details and helpful information.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Las Vegas and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Tuscany Suites & Casino (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel, as long as you have booked accommodations for the night prior to the trip’s departure and the night of the trip’s conclusion. The hotel cannot store any extra luggage for you so you will want to plan accordingly.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Las Vegas by 4:00pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Moab, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Moab. You will want to fly into either Grand Junction (2 hour drive), Salt Lake City (4 hour drive) or Moab.
Where do we meet our guides?
You will meet your guide at the specified hotel at 6:30am the morning your trip departs. The hotel breakfast starts at this time and we will eat together and have a brief orientation. We will go over the itinerary, expected weather (and how this might affect what clothing you bring…or leave behind), food, and answer any last-minute questions. We will also hand out day packs for anyone who needs them.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Moab by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 4:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation.
Most trips will depart between 4:30am and 6:30am. *This meeting is not mandatory, but highly recommended, as we will depart early the next morning. If you are unable to attend, please let us know in advance so that we can make alternate arrangements.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well. If not, we are happy to store extra luggage at our warehouse for the duration of the trip. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Flagstaff, AZ and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in Flagstaff. You will want to fly into either Phoenix (2 hour drive) or Flagstaff.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 7:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Little America Hotel in Flagstaff. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in Flagstaff and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Little America Hotel (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in Flagstaff by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will hold a pre-trip orientation at 7:00pm the evening prior to your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. Departure times and logistics for the following morning will be discussed at the orientation. Most trips will depart between by 6:30am.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in St. George, UT and you will need to spend the night prior to your trip’s scheduled departure in St. George. You will want to fly into either Las Vegas (2 hour drive) or St. George.
Where do meet our guides?
We will meet for at 6:00am the morning of your trip’s departure at the Best Western Abbey Inn in St. George. It is best to plan on staying at this hotel the evening prior to your trip’s departure.
What do we do with our car and extra stuff?
We will provide all transportation to/from trailheads for the duration of the trip. We will pick you up at your hotel in St. George and return you there at the trip’s conclusion. Guests staying at the Best Western Abbey Inn (recommended) can leave their cars at the hotel. The hotel will often store your luggage for you, as well, but please confirm this option in advance. If you are staying at a different hotel, you will need to check with them as to whether you can leave your car/luggage there.
What time will we get back on the last day?
Expect to be back in St. George by 5pm at the latest on the last day of the trip. Many trips will return earlier but we cannot make any guarantees. In general, it is recommended that you do not plan to fly home on the same day your trip finishes. Since each trip has slightly different logistics, feel free to contact us with specific questions related to the expected return time for your trip.
Meeting Time & Place
You will meet your guide at the Grand Canyon Visitor Center inside the park. The exact location will be arranged upon booking your reservation. Meeting times are largely dependent on time of year, though typically about 8am (October through April) or 6am (May through September).
What should you bring?
Appropriate clothing for the weather (call us for details if unsure), water bottles or hydration bladder (3 liter capacity per person), hiking shoes/boots, waterproof jacket/poncho, hat & sunglasses, camera, sunscreen. During colder weather, warm hats, gloves, and scarves will be desirable. Guide gratuities are customary and greatly appreciated.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Cusco, Peru. You will likely need to fly into Lima, Peru and transfer to Alejandro Valasco Astete International Airport in Cusco, where you will be met by our team to transport you to your hotel in Cusco. Please plan your arrival to Cusco prior to 3:00 PM as this will allow for you to attend the pre-trip orientation meeting.
For post-trip travel, your flights can be scheduled for any time on the last day of the trip.
Travel to Cusco
For your Peru adventure, you’ll need to arrive in Cusco prior to 3:00 PM on Day 1 of the trip. Upon arrival, your guide will meet you at the airport and transfer you to our hotel in the heart of Cusco. That evening, we’ll host a short orientation meeting to go over details of your upcoming trek, followed by a welcome dinner. Lodging is included on this first night.
On the final day of the tour, you may schedule your return flight from Cusco at any time.
Flights to and from Cusco are arranged individually. Most international travelers first fly into Lima, Peru, which is easily accessible from many major U.S. and European cities. U.S. departure options include Miami, Atlanta, Washington D.C., Chicago, Los Angeles, and more, with nonstop flights ranging from 5 to 9 hours. From Lima, it’s just an 80-minute domestic flight to Cusco.
International Travel Requirements
A passport is required for travel to Peru and needs to be valid for at least 6 months past the planned date of departure. A Visa is issued at the port of entry into Peru.
Travelers will need to show proof of departure from Peru to customs and immigration upon arrival in the country (i.e. a return airline ticket).
Trip Insurance
Due to the remote and challenging nature of international trekking, we strongly recommend that all guests purchase a comprehensive travel insurance policy that includes medical treatment, emergency evacuation, and repatriation coverage (minimum $200,000 USD).
While not mandatory, please note that Four Season Guides cannot assume financial responsibility for costs associated with medical care, evacuation, repatriation, or trip interruption. Guests who choose to travel without insurance acknowledge and accept full responsibility for these risks.
We recommend IMG’s iTravelInsured Travel LX plan or a comparable policy from another provider. If using another insurer, please confirm your coverage meets the minimum recommended limits.
If you're interested in learning more about the iTravelInsured Travel LX policy—what it covers, daily pricing options, and how to enroll - please click here.
Where does the trip begin/end?
This trip will begin/end in Cusco, Peru. You will likely need to fly into Lima, Peru and transfer to Alejandro Valasco Astete International Airport in Cusco, where you will be met by our team to transport you to your hotel in Cusco. Please plan your arrival to Cusco prior to 3:00 PM as this will allow for you to attend the pre-trip orientation meeting.
For post-trip travel, your flights can be scheduled for any time on the last day of the trip.
Travel to Cusco
For your Peru adventure, you’ll need to arrive in Cusco prior to 3:00 PM on Day 1 of the trip. Upon arrival, your guide will meet you at the airport and transfer you to our hotel in the heart of Cusco. That evening, we’ll host a short orientation meeting to go over details of your upcoming trek, followed by a welcome dinner. Lodging is included on this first night.
On the final day of the tour, you may schedule your return flight from Cusco at any time.
Flights to and from Cusco are arranged individually. Most international travelers first fly into Lima, Peru, which is easily accessible from many major U.S. and European cities. U.S. departure options include Miami, Atlanta, Washington D.C., Chicago, Los Angeles, and more, with nonstop flights ranging from 5 to 9 hours. From Lima, it’s just an 80-minute domestic flight to Cusco.
International Travel Requirements
A passport is required for travel to Peru and needs to be valid for at least 6 months past the planned date of departure. A Visa is issued at the port of entry into Peru.
Travelers will need to show proof of departure from Peru to customs and immigration upon arrival in the country (i.e. a return airline ticket).
Trip Insurance
Due to the remote and challenging nature of international trekking, we strongly recommend that all guests purchase a comprehensive travel insurance policy that includes medical treatment, emergency evacuation, and repatriation coverage (minimum $200,000 USD).
While not mandatory, please note that Four Season Guides cannot assume financial responsibility for costs associated with medical care, evacuation, repatriation, or trip interruption. Guests who choose to travel without insurance acknowledge and accept full responsibility for these risks.
We recommend IMG’s iTravelInsured Travel LX plan or a comparable policy from another provider. If using another insurer, please confirm your coverage meets the minimum recommended limits.
If you're interested in learning more about the iTravelInsured Travel LX policy—what it covers, daily pricing options, and how to enroll - please click here.
Trip Dates
2025 Trip Dates
2026 Trip Dates
Don’t see your dates? Custom dates may be available!
Call 1-928-525-1552 or email us for details.
Guest Testimonials
List of Services
-
Sharon J.
"Our Bryce and Escalante lodge-based hiking was a great trip! Matt’s knowledge and experience allowed him to show us things we never would have found on our own. He tailored the itineraries to the groups interests and abilities so that everyone had an enjoyable trip. I recently went on a tour with a larger guide company, but I really missed the small group size and personal touch provided by Four Season Guides. I highly recommend this company and look forward to hiking with them again next year!"
Sharon J.
-
Andrew P.
"This year was our second trip with FSG and it was absolutely perfect. Our guide Drew is a wealth of information and well studied on the geological and cultural aspects of the Americas, and in particular for our trip in the US Southwest. We did a lodge based tour this year and the entire operation was first class. The Inn was fantastic and a must for anyone in the area. The equipment and transportation/vans are all new or in perfect condition. The food on the trail was plentiful and varied. Drew put on some 5 Stars trail lunch spreads at spots with views only those with adventure in their blood can experience. The evening restaurants were far above our expectations, nearly resort gourmet! This annual trip with friends of 40 years is something that we all look forward to and Four Season’s has earned our respect and appreciation! From first contact to final departure, this is a job well done by Four Seasons!"
Andrew P.
-
McKenzie T.
"Our trip absolutely exceeded our expectations. I truly believe there was not a thing that I could suggest to improve the trip. Hiking activities: wonderful – the sights were amazing and appropriate. Owen did a great job of juggling some weather so that all were safe and able to experience sights that we may not have been able to if he wasn’t creative and flexible about the situation. Accommodations: stunning! We were amazed by how cute and comfortable the lodge was. This is truly a hidden gem of Escalante. It was definitely better than being in a hotel! Group: we had a group of diverse ages. There were a few struggles due to age/ability and also bodies adjusting to the elevation. There will always be some form of this in a group of strangers and so to me, it was expected. I am fully aware of this as a potential when signing up for a group experience. Hiking on different terrain, and in a different environment is not an easy task and I feel that the advice on training is very appropriate and should be taken seriously. Guide: I may have some bias because I have been with Owen before in the Grand Canyon, but he is an amazing guide. His experience, leadership, and knowledge of everything around us, is outstanding.
Overall, I came back for a reason. I appreciate everything that is put together for a wonderful experience. I thoroughly enjoyed it, and the trip was worth every moment being able to spend time with my husband who would have difficulty with backpacking trips. Thank you so much again and I can’t wait to see y’all in the future!"
McKenzie T.
-
Patrick R.
"We booked the Escalante lodge-based tour with Four Seasons with 2 other couples. It was a wonderful trip – perfect weather and a great itinerary covering Bryce and Escalante. The treks were mind-blowing in terms of scenery, and we were thrilled to avoid the crowds at Zion. Matt, our guide, was a wealth of knowledge and bent over backwards to accommodate the group throughout the trip. Lodgings were clean and quite comfortable — we all slept like babies. We will definitely be back for another excursion!"
Patrick R.
-
Melissa H.
“Hiking Rim 2 Rim in the Grand Canyon was a spiritual and life-changing experience for all of us – I cannot say enough about the exceptional customer service, attention to detail, and overall trip approach provided by Four Season Guides (FSG). The extensive expertise, company culture and overall philosophy makes FSG a stand out among the herd. I‘m so glad we did not pick the global “imitator” – while the outside wrapper may look identical – it was clear after running into a couple of those groups on the trail, we made the very best choice. It would have ruined the experience for me to be a part of a “circus clown car” hike – loud, rushed, and garish. FSG’s local, long time roots in the community, knowledge, respect of the canyon, the process and their clients has won us over forever. We are already planning our next adventure. Five star all around!”
Melissa H.
-
Rich H.Rich H.
"Hi Dave – I want to tell you that my rim to rim hike was exhilarating, exciting, excrutiating, and absolutely the most satisfying adventure I’ve ever been on. You could not have put together a better group of fellow hikers, and a totally fantastic guide in Lily. There has not been a day I don’t think about it. When I think about how many people visit the canyon, and how very few do what we did, what a sense of accomplishment. Thank you. When a person stands at the Bright Angel terminus and stare across to our north starting point, you can’t help but think it’s impassable. Lily was absolutley fantastic. We had danger, with the thunderstorm going down the north, to the rattler heading up, which one of us would have stepped on if not for Lily. On the trail, we saw one one of your competitors, I’m so glad I went with you. I have and will always recommend Four Seasons. You and your staff are 1st class. Thank You very much!"
-
David S.David S.
“My family and I have returned from our Rim to Rim experience with Four Seasons and more specifically with Matt. One word summary – Amazing! From the equipment pick up and orientation talk until we returned to our hotel after the hike you guys were great and professional. Matt is world class. It was great to have a guide who is spiritually connected to the canyon, loves his work and has great pride in sharing his “temple” with others. His knowledge and sharing of the geology and history of the people was truly captivating. He was amazingly respectful of our crazy and diverse dietary habits every meal and snack. I was more than a little challenge with a real fear of heights – Matt was so supportive and helpful in getting over those bridges (I hated every one of them).
Summary — you guys did a great job. I will pass this on to anyone you think I can to help your efforts to continue a first class backpacking company.”
-
Jacqueline J.Jacqueline J.
“Highly recommend using Four Season Guides! They are just incredible! We just finished the Rim to Rim trip with them and I am completely blown away by how much Four Season Guides enhanced the experience. Our guide, Bob, was so encouraging, knowledgeable, and made the best meals while on the trail – who knew you could have “fiesta night” with chicken burritos, guacamole and salsa while sitting under the stars in the Grand Canyon? Just incredible!
Four Season Guides is a great group of people. Everyone I spoke with was so responsive, helpful and professional. These people just love what they do and know everything about the hikes. I will be forever grateful that we used them for our Rim to Rim hike, and I can’t wait to work with Four Season Guides on our next adventure!!!"
-
Leo G.
“We booked the Winter Rim to Rim with Four Seasons Guides starting 28 November 2021. This was my first booking with FSG and it most certainly won’t be the last. From the start the planning and organization we received from Scott and Dave was second to none. All information was set out very clearly and any questions we had promptly answered. As for the trek, it was simply out of this world, challenging, beautiful and quite simply a life changing experience. Led by our guide Bob, at all times our safety came first and he set out very clearly the days objectives and challenges. Food was great, snacks plentiful and tents cosy!!!! All in all I can recommend booking any trip with FSG due to their professionalism and friendliness, HIGHLY recommended. Many thanks!”
Leo G.
-
Shannon B.
“Amazing Trip!!! My husband and I went on a Winter Rim to Rim Grand Canyon Trip with Four seasons. It was so great! The views were unbelievable and the experience unforgettable. Best time of the year to see the Grand Canyon! Our guide was great, it seemed like Jeremy knew everything about the Grand Canyon. He was a super nice guy, and very accommodating to every one on the trip from the very start. The team at Four Seasons was super helpful before the trip, answering any questions or concerns in a very timely manner. Very professional group at Four Season. Our guide was very well organized but also able to go with flow. Our equipment we used from Four seasons was in great shape and appropriate for the conditions we were experiencing. Jeremy did a great job preparing a variety food, which is very impressive for a 5 day backpacking trip. I will definitely be using some of his ideas in the future, haha. Highly Highly recommended this company for your next adventure. I know my husband and I are already looking in to more trip with Four Seasons.”
Shannon B.
-
Ben I.
“A friend and I were intent on doing the winter Rim-to-Rim hike in the Grand Canyon, and when we decided to go with a guide service, we opted to go with Four Seasons Guides. It’s a smaller business, which mattered to us, and we were pleased to be working with Dave, the owner, through much of the planning process. He is very experienced, friendly, and enthusiastic, and he answered all of our questions to our complete satisfaction. The trip itself was great, despite having to deal with the challenge of daily rain and snow showers. While the weather itself was very wet, the equipment that we brought, as well as the stuff provided by Four Seasons, kept us from getting soaked. The guide we worked with was a fine fellow named Bob. He kept us well-fed, well-informed, and well-rested. Bob is very good at this work. He’s personable, knowledgeable, efficient, and a real work-horse: everything you need in a competent, professional guide. The trail meals he whipped up were excellent, and it was interesting to watch him work. These guys know what they are doing. If you go with them, heed their packing lists and their advice! I had a great time and can certainly recommend Four Seasons to anyone interested in getting a guide service. I consider the valuable time and money that I invested in this trip to have been well-spent. I have no reservations at all in recommending these fine folks. They took great care of us, and as a person who used to lead group trips, I really understand what that means. I am an experienced hiker and backpacker (thirty-two years and lots of miles on my feet), and I was impressed with these folks.”
Ben I.
-
Sarah S.
“Had a great time on my rim-to-rim (and back) trip with friends and our guide, Tamara. From initial booking through trip end, I couldn’t have been more impressed with Four Season Guides. Prior to the trip, communication and guidance for preparation was excellent. Tamara was the best! She was interested in each of us, gave us great information as we hiked- particularly on geology, and prepared meals that were delicious. She was especially thoughtful in presenting information on indigenous people of the region. I wouldn’t hesitate to book another trip with Four Season Guides!”
Sarah S.
-
Michelle H.
“The Grand Canyon is a very sacred place to me. I have done many guided trips in the Grand Canyon and Utah and I had used the same guiding company and had great experiences. I thought it would be impossible for any other company to exceed those experiences. I was very wrong.
With a lot of reservation, I decided to try another guiding company. Four Season Guides was the first guiding company that I contacted, and Immediately I was taken aback. Four Seasons was able to accommodate my trip requests and within a few minutes I was booked for the Canyon Classic. Each time that I contacted them they responded immediately. I was able to speak to the same person each time. Our guide, Jeremy, was an absolute dream come true. He greeted us with the biggest smile, and you instantly felt his love for his job and felt comfortable with his ability to make our adventure something that would be a precious memory lasting a lifetime. He was knowledgeable, funny and took excellent care of each of us. All our meals were excellent. He was patient and allowed time to take pictures and plenty of stops to just take in the views. It was not just our amazing group that fell in love with the Grand Canyon, you could see the love Jeremy had as he shared the same appreciation as we did.
Our group had various levels of abilities and Jeremy was able to handle our group with such professionalism. He was able to kick up a conversation with every single person as if we had all been best friends for life. I literately cannot say enough good things about Four Seasons or Jeremy. Dave and Jeremy have kept in contact regarding my next adventure. They are not pushy and have no interest other than making sure my hiking experiences are what I want. Four Seasons puts a lot of effort in making sure the trip you choose is something that is within your capabilities and that you are prepared so that you do not have to worry about anything other than taking in the majestic Grand Canyon.
If you are looking for an adventure of a lifetime with an experienced guiding company, where the guides share the same passion as you then look no further because I feel confident Four Seasons will exceed your expectations.”
Michelle H.
-
Victoria C.
"A trip that far exceeded expectations! I found Four Seasons Guides while reading about things to do while at the Grand Canyon and signed up for a four-day Canyon Classic backpacking trip. I am so glad that I did because I had the most amazing experience and cannot wait to do another! I had only spent a few nights camping in my life and had never done any serious hiking prior to this trip. David, the owner, was so kind and spoke to me at length on the phone about what to expect and how best to prepare for the trip.
Our guide, Bob, was FANTASTIC. He not only prepared some of the best backcountry meals I’ve ever had, but also was incredibly knowledgeable about the Grand Canyon. Bob made sure to pace the trip in a way that everyone was comfortable and we’d take breaks to snack/catch our breaths on particularly challenging sections of the trail.
While the trip was challenging, I found the entire thing very doable. Four Seasons really emphasizes that preparing for the trip is fundamental and I could not agree more. While the Chicago winter and general flatness of the surrounding area made it challenging to practice any serious elevation change, I found that all my effort weight-lifting prior to the trip made the experience that much more enjoyable in the Canyon. My knees were tired the day after our descent, but I really appreciated our day in/near Phantom Ranch as a day of shorter hikes and not carrying the big packs!
The gear they provided was great! I really appreciated having both an air mattress and a foam pad. The sleeping bags were warm and the tents were great (and amazingly very light). If you’re worried about the food–don’t be. We had a bag full of delicious snacks to choose from on the trip and I was especially impressed with dinners that included fresh vegetables even on Day 3!
Overall, I was incredibly impressed with Four Seasons Guides. I felt so well taken care of the entire time I was in the Canyon and felt like I could always call beforehand if I had any questions. As someone who has spent so much time in cities, I enjoyed my time outdoors so much more than I expected. I cannot wait to join them on another trip!”
Victoria C.
-
Chris G.
“Our Grand Canyon hike with Matt was truly exceptional. From the first communications, the Four Seasons team was responsive, friendly and informative. The hike itself exceeded our expectations which is really saying something. Matt, and the company as a whole, clearly care about and have great respect for the Canyon. Matt was truly an expert on all things related to the Canyon. On more than one occasion we overheard other guides giving misinformation and also had guides ask Matt questions. It was such a comfort to be with someone who park rangers, other guides, phantom ranchers, and mule wranglers all knew and clearly respected. Not to mention he was just an awesome guy, made amazing meals (complete with fresh veggies every day!), and was a master at pacing the hike so we all enjoyed ourselves while pushing just enough. We are already planning our next trip with Four Seasons- just can’t decide which to do!”
Chris G.
-
Brittni M.
“This trip was above & beyond anything we could have imagined! It was definitely a bucket list trip for me, and it was perfect! I also just wanted to take a minute to tell you how AMAZING Jeremy was. Truly such a professional, fun, extremely knowledgeable guide. My husband & I can’t say enough positive things about our time with Jeremy- from the extra steps of gloves/mask while preparing food, taking us on side excursions while sharing his knowledge, frequently checking in with each of us. Not to mention he checked in with people not even traveling with our group that were struggling, and bandaged a strangers foot who was in a pretty bad way. You can tell he is passionate about his job & goes much over the simple “job expectations”-he represents the company so well!! I won’t name any specific names but we talked to several companies before booking this trip and after seeing a few others on the trail, I am exuberant that we chose to book with y’all. Really no comparison between our experience and what we witnessed their experiences to be. We can’t wait to travel with y’all again!! I’m also including a picture of the group, Jeremy Packing up to leave after dinner, and a nice view of the bridge leaving phantom ranch-feel free to use any of them if you would like!”
Brittni M.
-
Dawn D.Dawn D.
“This trip was A-M-A-Z-I-N-G. Our guide, Jeremy, was so knowledgeable about the Grand Canyon. He tried to make this the dream vacation thay we set out to have. The food was delicious and the scenery was nothing short of spectacular. We had a variety of experience in our group. My sons ages 23 and 18 were sprinting down and up the canyon. My 21 year old son was at a steady pace with his girlfriend. Finally, me, a 49 year old with zero hiking experience was bringing up the rear. Jeremy stayed with me and gave me encouragement. This was the most exhilarating trip I’ve been on. Four Seasons was top notch from booking the hike to answering all my questions to providing us with an amazing guide. Can’t wait til next time.”
-
Steve L.Steve L.
“Fantastic hiking trip. Well organized and informative. We were novice hikers and decided on a guided tour with FSG and could not have asked for a better setup and crew. Our FSG guide Brandon set up camp, cooked all the meals and guided us to the Colorado River and back safely in 100 degree plus weather. Following the trail is easy but getting there and enjoying getting there are completely different. Great experience, highly recommended.”
-
Erin H.Erin H.
“This was my mom and I’s first backpacking trip, we had a wonderful experience with great scenery. Our tour guide, Matt, excelled at setting a good hiking pace for our experience level, being knowledgeable about the Canyon’s history, and making amazing meals (we did not expect French pressed coffee on our backpacking trip!) overall our guide took great care of us. We highly recommend Four Season Guides if you’re looking for an adventure.”
-
Nicole T.Nicole T.
“What a terrific trip. This was a first trip with FSG and we will most definitely be booking again in the future. Our family completed the 3 day Indian Garden Backpacking trip in the Grand Canyon. Before our trip, our guide Scott, engaged us to make sure we had the appropriate gear and food for the trip, and brought options for us to try when we arrived at orientation (all of which we ended up using, so it was especially appreciated). This was the first backpacking trip for out daughters (middle school) and Scott was really thoughtful about making sure they had the right gear and their questions were answered before we left. Once we got to the trailhead, he was gracious as we all prepared for the trip down and, once on the trail, he was careful to make sure we were all feeling good. At camp and on the trail, he shared a few off the beaten path pools to cool off which we were grateful for, given the heat in the canyon. Meals were excellent, always in great locations, and Scott was good to make sure we were safe and prepared the entire trip. Scott was truly knowledgeable about the canyon and shared a lot of history with us throughout the trip. As a family trip, we could not have asked for a better guide or approach. We are already planning our next trip.”
-
Andrea P.
“My friends and I have booked an annual camping/backpacking trip with four season guides for the last three years. I cannot say enough about how amazing every trip is.This year my best friend wanted to celebrate her 35th birthday by backpacking the Grand Canyon with a core crew of friends. There wasn’t a question about who we would book the trip with.
We spent 5 days and 4 nights backpacking the Deer Creek Thunder River loop. Not an easy hike by any means, but worth every moment. If you’re looking for breathtaking views, water features, a great workout and total seclusion—this is the hike for you! We crossed paths with a handful of people on the trails.
The guides and owner Dave are really just the best people—knowledgeable, funny and fun. Although we carried all of our food for 5 days the food was delicious and plentiful. The hike itself was incredible—water features, amazing views, great camping spots. I travel quite a bit and this really is my favorite annual trip. Thanks Matt and Quin for leading the way, being great company and feeding us well! Until next time.”
Andrea P.
-
Tony H.
“We just returned from an epic 5 day/4 night trip trip to Deer Creek/Thunder River in the Grand Canyon. This was our 5th trip using FSG and the reason we keep coming back is their high level of customer service and friendliness. We had the pleasure of Jeremy and Lily leading our brigade. They are genuinely nice people who are really good at what they do. They had planned out every little detail whether it be visiting an architectural area and regaling us with the history of the era to french pressing our coffee in the morning. If you want a first class experience to some of nature’s greatest wonders, FSG will ensure every detail is perfect.”
Tony H.
-
George H.
“Just returned from my 5th group Grand Canyon hike with Four Seasons. We have become annual FS hikers, asking Dave to increase the level of difficulty each year. Deer Creek/Thunder River did not disappoint. Challenging terrain but we were amply rewarded with beatiful waterfalls, gorgeous views, and a chance encounter with a bighorn sheep cooling in the midday shade. Our guides were first rate, preparing great meals, sharing history of Grand Canyon pioneers, aiding blistered feet, and going the extra mile to ensure our comfort and safety. Do yourself a favor, train hard before you take on this trip. You will want to brag about it.”
George H.
-
Diane W.
“3rd trip with FSG! This time to the Grand Canyon. Wow! What another phenomenal hike. The surrounds, of course, defy description–descending through the layers of the Grand Canyon, only able to approach the side canyons through the ancient landslide that is Surprise Valley. Serpentine slots, desert oases, archeology and history, waterfalls bursting through the red limestone! It was a privilege to hike with Bob and Karne again. They are expert, fun guides and bottomless wells of knowledge about all things Grand Canyon. They managed all of the crucial details, allowing me to immerse myself in a Grand Canyon backpacking trip. I have never seen the canyon from on-foot before and the slower pace of walking (vs rafting or driving along the rim) is perfect to revel in the intriguing details and sweeping vistas of the Grand Canyon. Bob and Karne are very professional, guiding our team safely and comfortably through this desert hike. I deeply trust FSG’s guides in the backcountry. As always, preparing for such a trip was a cinch with FSG. Dave coordinated all of the details such that I was adequately prepared for this strenuous adventure. I highly recommend exploring with FSG.”
Diane W.
-
Anna G.
"The 4 day Hermit Loop was an adventure of a lifetime! From the moment we set foot on the trail, we were immersed in the canyon's awe-inspiring grandeur.
The entire trip was a testament to meticulous planning and personalized service. Every detail was thoughtfully considered, from the hearty and delicious meals that fueled our days to the seamless logistics that allowed us to fully immerse ourselves in the experience. Waking up to breathtaking panoramic views of the Grand Canyon each morning was an unforgettable highlight. This isn't just a hike; it's an opportunity to connect with nature on a profound level, and the exceptional support and guidance we received made it a perfect 10 out of 10 experience.
I wholeheartedly recommend this trip to anyone seeking an unforgettable adventure in one of the world's most spectacular landscapes."
Anna G.
-
Deena B.
“A Spectacular Experience! From our first contact with Four Season Guides, to farewell hugs at the conclusion of a mind-blowing backpacking trip, this was an outstanding experience. The trail itself was mind-blowing, and very different from the “corridor” we had done previously. This is definitely a route requiring an experienced guide, and we were in the best of hands with Jeremy and Four Seasons.
Being able to communicate directly with Dave, the owner of the company and himself an experienced guide, made all the difference in getting consistent, accurate, credible (and patient!) information, which was not our previous experience with a larger company. We also scored the Emperor of All Guides, Jeremy Williams, whose unflagging enthusiasm for the Canyon animated our entire experience. Jeremy was an inexhaustible source of Grand Canyon history, geology, botany, zoology, entomology, and lore–exactly the “nerd” you want on a guided adventure. (We encountered multiple people along the route–from Rangers to Wranglers–who greeted Jeremy with warm enthusiasm, and told us he was the best guide they knew.) Jeremy prepared delicious, healthy, abundant meals, and pampered us in every way (especially carrying enormous weight in water, food and gear so we didn’t have to).
We recommend this company whole-heartedly and will be back for more! Thank you for a spectacular experience.”
Deena B.
-
Bill W.
“Far beyond any expectations my husband and I had in our minds. We did a 5 day backpacking trip, the “Hermit Loop” itinerary with guide Matt. My husband and I have each been to the Grand Canyon previously, but those experiences were very superficial “peek over the rim” type trips. We felt very well-equipped with the equipment provided by Four Seasons, and I felt safe during all aspects of the trip. I could not have planned a better trip without the guidance of Matt and owner Dave.
The Hermit Loop trip showed us a side of the canyon we never knew existed. It really shows the vastness of the canyon and allows you to enjoy it on a more personal level without crowds. Definitely recommend this trip. Matt is a very enthusiastic, knowledgeable and caring guide in addition to being fun. You can tell how passionate he is about the canyon and nurturing similar feelings in his guests. He absolutely made this trip for us, and we will ask for him the next time we travel with FSG! Also, regarding food, my husband and I were prepared for granola and MRE-type meals we carry on personal backpacking trips– we were pleasantly surprised with the quality of food offered and abundance. We certainly did not expect fresh chicken fajitas the first night!”
Bill W.
-
Helen R.Helen R.
“Just back from Grand Canyon Hermit Loop, with Four Seasons Guides, backpacking for 5 days 4 nights end of September. The Hermit Loop is an amazing adventure with some time without packs. Highlights included a creek walk to the Colorado-Hermit rapids, very cool fossil rocks, tiny Salt Creek with smooth narrow canyon walls, camping by Granite Rapids with the thundering water, and the high isolation of the Tonto trail and desert lands, last evening having supper on Plateau Point (from Indian Gardens campsite) and hiking up Bright Angel trail before dawn .
Pre trip info was very informative, and we all arrived ready to go and fit enough to handle it. Our guide Jeremy was extremely well organized and took care of everything. Jeremy did all the cooking with very careful and thorough water and food preparation and cleanups. We had impressive meals and snacks every day and 3+ litres of clean water each. The FSG provided backpacks and equipment were very good – light and easy to set up. I especially loved the great sleeping bag and my little one woman tent.
Jeremy obviously loves being in the Grand Canyon and had extensive knowledge of the trails and history, biology and geology. It was a lot of fun to have him as our guide and to be shown his favourite sites, side creeks, and fossils. And I dont know how he carried that massive heavy pack.
Start training and go with Four Season Guides!”
-
Chris G.Chris G.
“Our first hike with Four Seasons Guides three years ago will always be special because we were in “shock and awe” for the first 48 hours and didn’t quite know how to think, feel and act because it was so incredibly different than anything we had ever experienced being from Ohio. That said, this hike, our third now with FSG took it to a new level! And, the experience was exactly what we had asked FSG for … longer, more remote, ability to venture into side canyons, etc.
Our FSG guide, Dave, was awesome in all respects … personality, responsibility, fun, sense of humor and adventure, thoughtfulness, meal prep, biology education and he’s part mountain goat! We’d definitely hike with Dave again and sincerely enjoyed his company. The Hermit Loop (down Bright Angel Trail, out Hermit Trail) is everything we hoped for and better. It’s so much nicer to only see a handful of people each day and get to explore the side canyons along the way, versus staying on the Bright Angel and South Kaibab trails the entire hike. Camping at Salt Creek and Hermit Creek are absolutely wonderful and we’d highly recommend them. The Tonto and Hermit trails are incredible experiences and so much more “authentic” feeling than the “highway” trails in GC. They truly enable you to enjoy a better sense of “adventure” and “unique, custom experience”. The weather in late April was perfect, all the equipment and gear worked just right and the food was delicious as always. We wouldn’t have changed a thing except for wanting to stay longer! And frankly, FSG’s rate structure provides excellent value for your dollar. We highly recommend both Four Seasons Guides and Dave specifically with absolutely no reservations!! Don’t look any further.”
-
Darlene I.
“I returned a couple of weeks ago from my 4 day guided Grandview Loop hike with Four Season Guides, and the trip was AMAZING!! I am still on a high about the hike! I have done tons of day hikes, but have never done overnight hiking, and was a little apprehensive, but Four Season guides made it very easy. Their packing list was spot-on, Dave was available for all of my questions by email, & Bob, our guide was terrific. The hike was challenging and so rewarding. The views were incredible and being out in nature day and night with silence and stars felt so good to my soul. I highly recommend Four Season Guides and will definitely hike with them again; hopefully in the near future!”
Darlene I.
-
Fazal A.
“I went for a 3 day Grandview Loop backpacking trip which turned out to be one of the amazing experiences of life. Our guide Matt was fantastic. I have never come across a guide who is so passionate and knowledgeable. Matt prepared all the meals for us which were delicious. In summary it was a fantastic experience and I look forward to some more trips in future with Four Season Guides.”
Fazal A.
-
David L.
“Fantastic, professional, one-of-a-kind experience! Four Seasons Guides are consummate professionals, knowledgeable, and excellent at getting the whole family engaged and energized. We hiked, laughed and faced very adverse conditions with no complaints from kids and never felt like the guides did not have everything under control. Bob and Brandon were a great team – Use them or any 4SG pro’s!!! 3 days 2 nights in Cottonwood Canyon and Horseshoe Mesa. Fantastic, totally professional guides who can have fun, teach and make sure everyone gets home with a big smile!”
David L.
-
George H.George H.
“Just returned from my 3rd Four Seasons hike, this time in the Kanab Creek wilderness which connects to the Grand Canyon. Gorgeous narrow canyons, gentle streams and boulder strewn areas to navigate that show the power of canyon flash floods. Our guide Jeremy was fantastic, imparting interesting history of canyon explorers, leading us on a great day hike through Jumpup Canyon that ended with dinner watching the recent Supermoon rise, and showing a keen sense of humor.”
-
Janet G.Janet G.
“Awesome trip into the Canyon. I highly recommend this trip to anyone wanting to see a less populated area of the canyon. Beautiful fern covered springs, idyllic pools and waterfalls and narrow canyons. This was our 13th trip with FSG. I highly recommend them.”
-
Dan S.Dan S.
“I have recently completed a Kanab Creek hike which lived up to its billing of being “off the beaten path”, but as usual with FSG it was an excellent trip. Our leader, Scott, was supportive, very friendly, and always extremely professional. As a somewhat older hiker I was very appreciative of his keeping watch over me. The food on the hike, as usual, was extremely good, varied, and nutritious, everything you need during and after a hard day’s trek. We saw spectacular scenery, we worked hard, and we had unique camps in which to recharge for the next day. From beginning to end, FSG did a spectacular job, and I want to say how much I appreciate everything.”
-
Sherrie H.Sherrie H.
“I put my trust in Four Season Guides. Last year I did the rim to rim hike with my girlfriends using their services. It was awesome, so I felt the pull to come back and bring my daughter for some mother/daughter bonding time. I also wanted something a little more off the grid and slightly more challenging. Dave, the boss of the company, found us the perfect hike! It was gorgeous (as he said it would be) and Scott was the most confident, prepared guide we could have asked for. Being more ‘backcountry’ gave me some concern, but Scott kept us safe and motivated. And he was a very good cook! There are other guide companies, but I would definitely go with FOUR SEASON GUIDES again!”
-
Alan P.
” Best In The Business! I can’t say enough good things about Four Season Guides! They are truly the best. I have been traveling the world for over 30 years and have been on countless guided tours and few companies can approach the level of professionalism these folks display. I have now been on 7 trips with Four Seasons and have had the pleasure of travelling with 4 different guides from the company. All of them are fantastic at what they do: extremely knowledgeable, outgoing, fun, safety-orientated, excellent cooks (chicken fajitas in the Grand Canyon backcountry!!!) and extremely accommodating to each and every participant in the group.
At this point, FSG is custom-fitting trips to my (and my friend’s) desires, meticulously planning new adventures for us every year. And every year, it’s the one event I look forward with unrivaled anticipation.
I have travelled with one of the other top-rated companies here on Trip Advisor and, although the trip was enjoyable and successful, the guide was obviously not as familiar with the area, nor as experienced at handling a diverse group of people. Just goes to show the benefit of going with the guys who have been doing it the longest. Four Season Guides definitely have the most talented folks I’ve seen in the outdoors!
My undying gratitude to “the Brians”, Scott, Dave, Bob, Omar, Ryanne and everyone else at FSG. You guys are the BEST and I can’t for for another 10 days in the backcountry this fall! Look no further…Four Season Guides is the Best In The Business”
Alan P.
-
Doug S.
“A personalized Grand Canyon Summer Tour for our six person family (grandparents, grandsons 13, 13, and 15, and father). Five Stars is inadequate to describe how much we enjoyed our four days with Karne. Every detail was perfectly planned and executed. Karne gave us a spectacular life-long memory. She brought and prepared delicious high quality food, provided very comfortable travel, excellent camping accommodations, outstanding and fun hiking tours, amazing education along the way and much much more. It was all fabulous! Karne exceeded our expectations in every aspect of this adventure. She is the ultimate professional and a wonderful person to spend four days with.”Doug S.
-
Nick L.Nick L.
“The trip was great and the guides even better. They were fun, conscientious, great cooks, and full of information about the sights and the local area. I traveled with my adult daughter – a great family experience! I highly recommend traveling with Four Seasons. They know their stuff!”
-
Debbie B.Debbie B.
“First trip to GC with husband and 18 yo daughter. Matt our guide was a GC guru and enjoyed sharing his love and respect for all things GC. Great hikes from south rim, marble canyon where we got to get wet in the Colorado, and north rim with its cooler temps. We are vegetarian and this ended up being a benefit. The fresh vegetables, trail side slicing of tomatoes and avocados, hummus, snacks all incredible!! Highly recommend Four Seasons between the communication, knowledgeable guides, equipment and food you cannot go wrong.”
-
Anne T.
“Four Seasons is the gold standard of guided hiking trips! I just returned from a mule assisted hike to the bottom of Grand Canyon with guide Jeremy. I’ve traveled with other companies in U.S. parks and abroad, and Four Seasons tops them all. The guides are friendly, knowledgeable, experienced, fit and fun to hike with. The equipment is well maintained and of good quality. The food is outstanding, plentiful and tailored to your needs (vegetarian, lactose free, GF. Whatever your requirements). If you want to enjoy the hike without the hassle of putting it together, I heartily recommend Four Seasons.”
Anne T.
-
Rory N.
“This was our best trip ever. We were a group of four, Mum, Dad, and 2 adult kids on our first family trip in years. Lily was our guide – knowledgeable, patient, informative, great cook and great fun. She has an intuitive ability to cajole and encourage a group to make the most of what should be – and was for us – the trip of a lifetime. Our overall experience of Four Season Guides is that they are a professional, well run, and friendly who genuinely care for the lucky guests they guide through some of the most beautiful and impressive – I almost said awesome – places on the planet.”
Rory N.
-
Pat H.
“Just back from a guided trip into the Grand Canyon, led by Karne from Four Seasons. The trip, Karne (!), and really everything from our initial contact with FSG on were truly first rate. Dave and Scott were highly responsive to all our pre-trip questions and a pleasure to work with. Our amazing hike into the GC was significantly enhanced by Karne’s knowledge of the canyon, as well as her expertise in leading us and making sure we were prepared throughout the trip. The camping gear provided by FSG was excellent. All in all a most memorable experience. I would highly recommend FSG.”
Pat H.
-
Steve C.
“For my third time, I chose Four Seasons Guides to make my Grand Canyon experience safe and wonderful. Four Seasons Guides has consistently provided me with seasoned guides who earn your respect and generate your total appreciation. Each of the guides I have used over the 9 years (Scott, Bob and Jeremy) are well prepared, totally knowledgeable and enthusiastic about your Grand Canyon experience.”
Steve C.
-
Dennis S.
“This was my 3rd trip with Four Seasons and as usual they did a fantastic job. Dave is extremely knowledgeable about the history of the canyon and a great cook. I will definitely use Four Seasons in the future.”
Dennis S.
-
John M.
“Awesome trip from start to finish. Matt was incredibly knowledgeable and did a wonderful job of helping us navigate the canyon. Everything was taken care of, so my father and I really had the opportunity to experience all that Phantom Ranch and the canyon had to offer. Would definitely recommend to anyone looking for a way to experience the canyon from top to bottom!”
John M.
-
Steven H.Steven H.
“Great communication leading up to trip from Dave. He provided helpful information and made minor adjustments based on our requests to arrive at South Rim a day early.
On the trip itself, we could not have been happier with Bob – he was an excellent team leader. He adapted the pace based on the needs of the group and kept us all going. The meals he prepared were healthy and outstanding quality. Bob also had great suggestions for what to do on our “off” day and led us on a really nice hike into the Box.
This was a once in a lifetime trip for us and we are so grateful that we were able to get it in. Highly recommend Four Seasons.”
-
Jackie L.Jackie L.
“My friend and I recently returned from a fantastic trip down the Grand Canyon to Phantom Ranch. I am so thankful to Four Season Guides for everything! Dave, you did a wonderful job matching us with a very fun couple. It was so nice to get to know them and share this experience. Our guide Matt was truly one of a kind and did the best job leading us. His knowledge and confidence helped us to relax and enjoy the beauty and peace of the Canyon! If you are thinking of doing this trip, book with Four Season Guides, follow the suggested workouts and you will have the best time of your life! This was a trip I will never forget and hope to be back someday! Matt get your next trip ready for us!”
-
Jennifer A.Jennifer A.
“We spent four amazing days, hiking down into the Grand Canyon, climbing cliffs and floating on the Colorado. We booked the trip through Four Seasons and it was a true trip of a life time! We brought our four teen aged kids and experienced sights and adventures beyond imagination. I can’t wait to travel with Four Seasons again!!”
-
Lawrence K.Lawrence K.
“My 2 teenagers (ages 16 and 18) and I did the Marble Canyon & Vermilion Cliffs Lodge-based hiking trip in March of 2019. It was an amazing 4 day and 3 night trip. My teenagers loved it! My daughter did not want to camp so we decided on the lodge based trip. The lodge where we stayed was clean, comfortable and close to the hikes. What really made the trip GREAT was our guides Scott and Bob. There were both great people. They made us feel comfortable and welcomed. They have incredible knowledge of the area and history of the Grand Canyon. Totally enjoyed hearing all their stories. I am looking forward to another guided trip with Four Season Guides soon.”
-
Suzanne R.Suzanne R.
“Three friends and I participated in the Marble Canyon trip in March 2017 and all four of us were beyond delighted with the entire trip from the beginning orientation until our van arrived back in Flagstaff on the last day. We had an OUTSTANDING guide who not only led us on some of the most spectacular hikes I have ever meandered about, but she also was extraordinarily knowledgeable about the Canyon and the surrounding area…a totally unexpected and wonderful bonus for the trip. I thoroughly enjoyed our accommodations in Marble Canyon. I loved the peace and quiet and immense beauty of being nestled in amongst the Vermilion Cliffs. So so much better than the over crowded South Rim places!!
As my husband and I begin to plan our Rim to Rim hike in the Canyon, we are definitely going to contact Four Seasons Guides to guide us there!! Their services are worth every penny!!! I highly highly recommend this guiding outfit and will use their services again and again!!!”
-
Jennifer J.Jennifer J.
“We just did the Marble Canyon /Vermilion Cliffs trip and it was wonderful. Bob was knowledgeable entertaining and very patient with our younger hikers (9 and 11) who had good stamina but needed more frequent bathroom breaks… Bob was able to avoid the crowded areas during a very busy Canyon visitation week and we had a fantastic and unique experience catered to our family. Cliff Dwellers was an amazing location to stay the night and the food was good and plentiful. Hoping to hike with Four Seasons Guides in the future.”
-
Meghan Z.Meghan Z.
“Wow…just WOW! I had such an amazing time. My mind is blown, and all I can think about is going back to see more! Huge thank-you to FSG for such a well-planned, carefully thought-out, enjoyable, and memorable adventure! I am so humbled by the beauty and vastness of the Canyon, I just cannot even believe it. My heart is soaring!
Thank you, FSG! I’ll be back.”
-
Walter K.Walter K.
“My daughters and I truly enjoyed our Grand Canyon Complete adventure with Four Season Guides. We had initially heard of Four Season Guides through friends who had relied on their expertise for their own travels. Dave presented several options to us, especially since the popularity of hiking to the bottom of the Grand Canyon limits the number of permits that are available by lottery. In retrospect, our Plan B adventure turned out to be even more fun than our originally planned trip to the bottom of the Grand Canyon and back. We hiked many miles, challenged ourselves by scrambling boulders and ledges in the Cathedral Wash of the Marble Canyon, and dined both on the trails and in restaurants at night in the Grand Canyon and at our cool hotel in the Marble Canyon.
We really enjoyed the time we had spent with our Guide, Karne. Her enthusiasm, friendly, upbeat nature, knowledge of the terrain, and access to areas far away from the typical crowds one might expect made our time in the Grand Canyon and the slot canyons even more memorable. Karne drove us to our different destinations, hiked with us, prepared our lunches, and took us to a number of unexpected places, including the California Condor release site in the Vermilion Cliffs (where we saw 4 condors), Navajo Bridge near Lee’s Ferry (where we saw a fifth condor), and the Cathedral Wash scramble, which turned out to be our favorite outing. While one could argue that we missed out on the experience of camping in platform tents at the bottom of the canyon and instead slept in comfortable beds with real showers and bathrooms, our adventure gave us the opportunity to experience a far greater variety of places around and near the Grand Canyon. Ponderosa pines on the North Rim, slot canyons, rides through Navajo Country, seeing a great number of different birds and animals in those different places, and even the experience of walking inside the Glen Canyon Dam and seeing Horseshoe Bend from the river made our trip exciting and unique.
Our time with Four Season Guides became far more than exploring the South Rim of an enormous hole in the Earth; it has become the standard by which we will compare any other guided adventures that we take in the future. We hope to use them again as well!”
-
Liz O.Liz O.
“This was an amazing four-day trip. Our guides, Scott and Blair, did a fantastic job of showing us the incredible diversity of the Grand Canyon and were very knowledgeable about the natural history and culture of the region. I have done a lot of guided trips, and Four Seasons is right up there with the best of them. There’s not a single thing I would change. Thank you!!!”
-
Karen W.Karen W.
“There are no words! Sensory overload. Four Seasons provided an experience of a lifetime to see the Grand Canyon. We embarked on the Lodge Based 4 Day Hiking and Float Trip. Each day was brilliant and breathtaking and challenging. Our guide, Scott, was exceptional-cannot imagine doing this adventure without him. We took the paths less taken – that is, we did not do the main tourist routes. Our first hike at the South Rim-we saw 6 people on the trail AND it was challenging. Views of unspeakable beauty. Day two we went to Buckskin Gulch and wow – slot canyons! Conquered fears along my first slick rock climbs! Day 3-North Rim-trail hiking and take that picture at the highest points on the rim-then-oh yeah-eat lunch directly on the North Rim. Four Seasons takes care of all logistics (transportation, lodging, equipment, and meals-even on the hike) so that you can have a full experience! Our accommodations were basic but had modern day needs – but the FOOD! Delish! The restaurant at the lodge – no wonder guests from miles away came there, delicious and amazing presentation. And our guide, Scott, put together incredible meals on the trail-oh no-not mere sandwiches! Each day was a different meal format-who knew this was “roughing it” -it was not! Added in the Navajo Bridge! We saw the most people at Horseshoe Bend-which was amazing. Then off we go to Glen Canyon Dam and a float trip around Horseshoe Bend.
Scott not only guided us along the trails but was exceptionally knowledgeable about the canyons, formation, history, and culture. He was also very accommodating. Looking for a second adventure and I will be going with Four Seasons!”
-
Brandon H.Brandon H.
“I did this trip with my 12 year old son. It was incredible- Jeremy was our guide…WOW! Not a better guide in all of Arizona for us! He was so knowledgeable and the perfect guide for us! I will book with tem again and again!”
-
Charlie D.Charlie D.
“Our group of two families joined FSG for the Grand Canyon & Sedona trip and it was absolutely the vacation of a lifetime! The scenery was of course outstanding. But every other detail of the trip was meticulously planned and perfectly executed. The hotels were perfect, the meals were fantastic, and our guide was an absolute dream! Karne made this trip so much more special. She was so kind, entertaining, thoughful, and incredibly informative. The kids adored her (so did the adults) and we just had a blast together for 4 days. This was out first guided vacation and we are now hooked! Can’t wait to book the next adventure with Four Season Guides!”
-
Joy L.Joy L.
“I’ve hiked with FSG many times. Thanks to them, I’ve been able to enjoy majestic vistas and countless natural treasures that can only be accessed by a willingness to put one foot in front of the other. I’ve tried others, like REI, but nothing compares to the personalized service provided by FSG. They have decades of experience that equates to a fun and memorable trip. I highly recommend them to everyone. They are the best!”
-
Kirsten R.
"We loved our trip to Grand Canyon and Sedona. This company is top notch. Our guide Dani was incredible. The food was always delicious, the lodges were lovely, and the guided hikes were outstanding. I highly recommend Four Season Guides!"
Kirsten R.
-
Mary C.Mary C.
“We wanted to hike and explore Grand Canyon but were not excited about camping. Dave, the owner, was an excellent help in recommneding the perfect trip for us. Since we were visiting in July, he recommended the Grand Canyon Explorer so that we could enjoy a variety of hikes and not suffer from the extreme heat that is so common in the bottom of the canyon at that time of year. We hiked on the South Kaibab Trail (incredible views!) and variety of “guide’s choice” hikes on the North Rim. Our guide Bob was incredible…friendly, fun, knowledgable, and so accommodating. He made us delicious lunches on the trail each day and made sure we were comfortable, safe, and having fun. The lodge accommodations were excellent…rustic, comfortable, and in the most beautiful places. And the itinerary was so well thought out. Every aspect was well-planned and expertly executed. We have already booked our next trip with Four Seasons!”
-
Jude S.Jude S.
“The Grand Explorer trip was AWESOME! Perfect for my family and an excellent choice for exploring Grand Canyon in the summer. The North Rim cabins were simple but comfy and the setting can’t be beat…steps away from the canyon rim. We woke up early enjoyed coffee on the rim with practically no one else around. The guides were fantastic and the hikes offered great variety and incredible views. I couldn’t have asked for a better trip. We will be back!”
-
Beth G.Beth G.
“FANTASTIC!!! We did the 4 day/3 night lodge-based hiking trip to the Grand Canyon. Everything was executed with perfection! Karne was the most fun and best guide. She was very knowledgeable and prepared us amazing lunches on the trail. Loved working with Four Season Guides on this trip and can’t wait to book another one!”
-
-
Check back soon for updates on their experiences exploring with us.
-
-
Theresa D.
“This was our first trip to see the Grand Canyon and honestly cannot recommend enough! Our guide was so knowledgeable about the canyon, trails, history, and more. They had all the gear we could possibly need including backpacks, trekking poles, snow gear for our boots, and even extra jackets. Lunches, drinks, and tons of snacks were provided. The lodge was also fantastic! Rooms were clean and the food at the restaurants was absolutely amazing! Cannot wait to do another trip with this company! If you are hesitating if it’s worth it or if it’s for you, BOOK THE TRIP”
Theresa D.
-
Hana H.
“We hired Four Season Guides to organize our hiking trip to the Grand Canyon. This company is amazing. Dave and Scott are very responsive, answered all questions right away and our guide was just exceptional. We originally got a permit for camping trip to Horseshoe Mesa, but due to the crazy weather, lots of snow and cold temperatures, it was changed to lodge based hiking trip. I must admit, we were a bit disappointed at first, but the selected hikes, length, scenery and a coffee and a hot shower at the end the 8 hour hikes did its magic. We would not change a thing about this trip. It was just perfect. Coordination of transportation, food choice during hikes as well as a choice of restaurants was exceptional. Our guide was very easy to communicate with, exceptionally knowledgeable about the area and the Grand Canyon and we really enjoyed his company. Thank you Four Season Guides for great memories and unforgettable experience!”
Hana H.
-
Suzana N.
“Our 3 day “Lodge Based Adventure” trip to the Grand Canyon was an amazing and unforgettable experience. Our guide Bob was wonderful: very experienced, knowledgeable and professional. He took great care of us, made amazing meals and tried to accommodate us all the time. He was a great companion and made our trip even more special and fun. We chose Four Season Guides because it was a small, local company that had great reviews. They provided us with exceptional service and their love and passion for the outdoors was very evident. We would love to hike with them again.”
Suzana N.
-
Jeff S.
“Wow! We had such an awesome experience with Four Season Guides hiking the South Kaibab Trail at the Grand Canyon! Brian was our tour guide and he is amazing! My wife and I both have a healthy fear of heights and Brian was awesome about getting us comfortable with the trail while also making it clear we could do a different hike if necessary. In general, Brian is super friendly and fun and he brought great energy all day. He shared a ton of interesting nuggets about Grand Canyon history and geology. Brian also offered to take photos for us which we appreciated.
We were really tired by the end of the hike but we absolutely loved our experience and Brian/Four Season Guides was the main reason why!”
Jeff S.
-
Alison C.
“What an amazing experience!!! Our hike guide was knowledgeable and did a great job guiding us on the South Kaibab trail of the Grand Canyon to Skeleton Point and back to the South Rim. He was prepared and helped us navigate the canyon safely. We also had a delicious lunch and learned so much about the canyon. Dave was also terrific with assisting us with booking our hike and answered all our questions. I highly recommend Four Seasons Guides! I felt reassured and informed every step of the way.”
Alison C.
-
Somer J.
“Excellent company! From the first interaction when booking until the end of the hike, they were attentive, informative and kind. It was clear that Four Seasons is a pro in the space as no detail was missed. They communicated well from the get-go, answered questions, were timely, checked in during the hike and even kept the kids (and ok, the adults too:-) entertained and distracted with fun riddles. Highly recommend and look forward to doing another adventure with Four Seasons!”
Somer J.
-
Emily E.
“1000% worth it! Hermit trail was spectacular and our guide, Steve, was fabulous in every way: knowledge, experience, enthusiasm, trail-side chef skills, all top notch. Thank you FSG!”
Emily E.
-
Kirk W.Kirk W.
“Four seasons is a excellent guide company that is reasonably priced and a bargain if you look back at the experience. The guide we had, Karne, is beyond compare from my past experiences. The itinerary was ideal, not to easy, not to hard, and the continual check on group's well-being, asks, proper snacks, breaks, lunch- was truly first class.
I would not only recommend Four Seasons, but I will be going back again in the near future for more experiences in the amazing Southwest!”
-
Erika V.Erika V.
“My family of four (parents and 2 teens ages 13 and 15) went on a half day hike of the Hermit Trail with Owen and had a fantastic time. Owen is both incredibly knowledgeable and personable. My son had a blast with him finding fossils in the rocks and keeping up with him on the hike, and the adults enjoyed learning more about the trail's history, the plant and animal life and also sorts of facts about the canyon. Four Seasons was a pleasure to work with, they helped us decide which trail to hike and were exceptional in bringing a special lunch and snacks for our pickier kid. My kids were very excited to have hiking poles and the adults were very happy to have them as they make the hike much more enjoyable. My kids generally do not love to hike but having Owen as a guide changed the whole experience and all four of us had a blast. I would highly recommend Four Seasons, with any luck one day we'll do a multi-day hiking trip with them sometime in the future.”
-
Arthur L.
“Four Seasons Guides are consummate professionals, knowledgeable, and excellent at getting the whole family engaged and energized. We hiked, laughed and faced very adverse conditions with no complaints from kids and never felt like the guide did not have everything under control. An excellent hike!”
Arthur L.
-
Stephanie A.
“Karne was a fantastic guide and kept our four kids (19, 15, 14) engaged as she taught us about the geology and history of the area. She made sure we were well-outfitted and well-fed. The lunch she prepared was delicious. We only had the one day in the Grand Canyon and I'm glad we hired a guide to make sure we made the most of our short time there. The people in the Four Seasons Guides office were immensely helpful as I peppered them with questions before booking this hike. I would absolutely use them again if we are lucky enough to visit again!”
Stephanie A.
-
Kimberly R.
“For my 50th birthday we decided to hike the Grand Canyon on my birthday day 12/16/70. Matt was our Guide and he helped me through some "not sure if I want to do this moments," but I survived! We did the Grandview Trail which was beatiful. Thank you Matt and Four Season Guides for making my 50th birthday rock and keeping me safe enough to hopefully enjoy more birthdays to come.”
Kimberly R.
-
Bryan R.Bryan R.
“We could not have been more happy with our choice to use Four Season Guides for our trip. We spent the day with Scott as he guided us down the Grandview Trail to the Horseshoe Mesa. He made a great lunch and picked the perfect spot to feel like we were engulfed by the canyon. It was my wife's birthday and Scott even made her a brownie cake. Nice touch! We had a lot of great views along the quiet trail and great education as well. I would recommend this trip to everyone I know! We can't wait to use Four Season again, when we hope to visit Zion and make it a longer trip.”
-
Drew P.Drew P.
“This was our third trip with Four Seasons (previously did Rim to Rim and Yosemite/Half Dome) and each one has been great. Most recently experienced a fabulous 5 day trek in Utah on the Boulder Mail Trail. Our guide, Bob, was experienced, friendly and flexible. Equipment provided was first rate and the food, transportation and logistics all went according to plan. Highly recommend this trip with Four Seasons if you want a challenging and fun adventure with breathtaking scenery and solitude.”
-
Mark L.Mark L.
“Amazing location, amazing group, amazing guide. The whole experience was beyond expectations. We were pleasantly surprised that our guide was Jeremy, whom we had hiked the Grand Canyon Rim to Rim hike back in 2019. Jeremy goes out of his way to take good care of every one of his customers. This time it was the Boulder Mail Trail in Utah. What a beautiful state! Backcountry hiking at its best. Mostly we had the place to ourselves. Definitely glad I took their advice and trained for this hike as this was no beginner hike.”
-
Mary C.Mary C.
“Boulder Mail Trail is my third trip with Four Season Guides, and they just keep getting better. Their ninja logistics skills rival world class militaries. Get in shape, get to the start, and they handle everything else. Great gear, great routes that are diverse and well timed for weather and nature, highly experienced/skilled/knowledgable/friendly guides, and not your standard freeze dried camp meals. I can’t wait for my next trip!”
-
Larry F.Larry F.
“I just completed my third backpacking trip with Four Seasons Guides, this time the Boulder Mail Trail in Grand Staircase-Escalante National Monument in Utah after two Grand Canyon hikes. Scott, our guide, proved he knows this region at least as well as the Grand Canyon, which we hiked with him last year. Scott has the technical and social skills to make any trip thoroughly enjoyable. When we needed to adapt the itinerary slightly to ensure availability of water, Scott was clear and forthright about our choices. (And we ended up seeing more of the gorgeous Escalante River canyon than we might have otherwise.) He is interested and conversant in a wide range of topics and makes his guests feel right at home. In advance of the trip, Dave is always available to offer any help or guidance needed. This is a first-rate company that intentionally stays small and focused on the Southwest to provide the best possible service. Its guides are deeply experienced, knowledgable and dedicated to running successful trips. Four Seasons is a top-notch outfit.”
-
Robert K.Robert K.
“Our third backpacking adventure with Four Seasons Guides was another “Experience of a Lifetime.” The spectacular Escalante region challenged us physically and rewarded us mentally and spiritually. Our experienced, organized, calm and skillful guide, Scott, engaged and motivated us with his enthusiasm, knowledge, and reverence for the land and its ancient inhabitants. He carried a massive pack of untold weight so the rest of us could manage the steep ascents and descents with our own big packs. He fed us well, kept us hydrated with purified water from fresh sources, and challenged us to be stewards of this precious natural wilderness. As always, company owner Dave was available for months in advance to respond to our questions and concerns. This is a beautifully-run company which makes makes every guest feel welcome and part of the family. We will continue to travel with them again and again.”
-
Richard C.Richard C.
“The wilderness we backpacked through was magnificent. We would never have been able to take such a trip on our own. Our guide, Bob, was extremely knowledgable of the terrain and kept our group safe at all times. He was positive and patient at all times. There were a few times when I was afraid of the steepness of the slick rock (everyone else had no problem), and he helped me get through it. We highly recommend this company!'”
-
Sarah M.Sarah M.
“I went by myself on this tour-there were 2 other hikers and our guide Bob. I had a fantastic time on a 4 day guided tour of the area. Bob, was awesome. He took care of everything, including producing delicious meals 3 times a day! The area we travelled was so beautiful-visiting this region has been on my wishlist for some times and Four season guides gave me easy, safe access. I will definitely go through Four Seasons again for future hikes-i think Yosemite might be next!”
-
Steve A.Steve A.
“This was my 4th backpacking trip using Four Season Guides and every trip has been fantastic. This last trip was in Grand Staircase-Escalante in Southern Utah. Our guide, Scott, was great. He kept us on track, well fed and comfortable despite a variety of weather conditions, including a crazy wind storm. FSG makes it easy by providing all the logistics, equipment and food – plus awesome guides like Scott and Bob C. (who guided our previous three trips). These guys are the best, a 12 on a scale of 1 to 10!”
-
Wendy K.Wendy K.
“We had heard about Coyote Gulch for years and wanted to explore it. We opted to go with Four Season Guides due to its remote location and our inexpereince in desert/canyon hiking. We are so glad we found FSG…our guide was amazing! He had been exploring the Escalante region for almost 20 years and knew every twist and turn in the canyon, every great camping spot, and had an unbelievable eye for the ancient rock art and structures. Our group was perfectly cohesive and we made some great new friends. We are already planning our next FSG adventure with them. Absolutely the trip of a lifetime. Top-notch professionalism at every step!”
-
Larry S.Larry S.
“We have used Four Season Guides many times over the past 6 years. Our recent trip to Coyote Gulch with guide, Scott, was so much more than we expected. The scenery is spectacular, wading in and out of the river was so much fun! Scott is an absolutely wonderful guide with much knowledge of the area. He has explored this area on his own to get to know the ins/outs & passes along all of the history he has learned. Scott tailored the trip to my husband and I. Safety was first, and always is with FSG, when storms were brewing. Scott knew safe places to sleep where we could get out of the wind and rain. Not only is Scott excellent company but an excellent backcountry cook also! Thank you Scott and FSG for another awesome trip out to the beautiful west!”
-
Richard B.Richard B.
“The Coyote Gulch hike was the third time that I have used Four Seasons. As in my previous hikes, this guide service provides impressive support both before and during the hike. Scott, our guide, sets the “Gold Standard” for excellence in guiding: assured trail leading, deep and detailed knowledge of geology and ancient civilizations, a gifted conversationalist, and a superb cook. You could sense that this was not just a job to Scott, but that he genuinely wanted us to enjoy every minute of the hike. Furthermore, the scenery in the canyons was absolutely stunning!”
-
Duane B.Duane B.
“Four Season Guides provided us with an experience that we’ll talk about for many years. Unique to this backcountry trip was the ability to see Indian ruins and pictographs dated back nearly 1000 years. Four Season Guides are knowledgeable and take the stress out of the trip by taking care of all logistics. This was our 4th family backpacking trip using Four Seasons and are planning another trip for next year. We are experienced backpackers but truly enjoy traveling with Four Seasons. Our guide has become an extension of our family!”
-
Elizabeth B.Elizabeth B.
“This is my 4th trip with FSG and it won’t be my last. I recently returned from a 5 day backpack trip in Canyonlands (Salt Creek) with Bob. The landscape and historical sites were beautiful and interesting. This was a fantastic trip! Like my other FSG guides, Bob was amazing. He knows the landscape, history and did a great job of getting to know our group and picking the right hikes and stopping points tailored for us. The group size is also small (this trip was me + 3 other guests and the max size is 5).
FSG takes care of everything. I used their equipment (which is top notch) and they plan and prepare (and clean up) all the meals. Meals & snacks are delicious and great care is taken to include fresh vegetables & fruit, which isn’t easy when backpacking! You will never go hungry. A few things to note — you will need to help carry food/supplies and on this trip a bear can is required (they provide). This is also backcountry camping – so no bathrooms and no cell phone reception. A great way to get off the grid and enjoy the landscape. If you’re looking for a small, personalized, fun trip with an experienced, professional guide & company – don’t hesitate to book with FSG. I can’t recommend them highly enough!”
-
Alan P.Alan P.
“This hiking trip was A-1. With all the logistics planned for us, FSG took us down Salt Creek where we were guided to many and varied archaeological sites with spectacular petroglyphs, pictographs, potsherds and grinding stones, not to mention one of the most spectacular arches you will ever see, among a number of others in this area. The trip was well-planned and carried out. Our guide (over 14 years with this company and wilderness first-aid qualified) was well-versed in the terrain, history, and safety and cooking skills. The food was well thought out and prepared, fresh ingredients dominated. We started under threat of potential rains from a recent Pacific storm and our guide stayed on top of that issue, setting great camps and altering the hiking schedule to keep out of any potential flood danger. I can’t say enough about this amazing trip. If you are contemplating backpacking or day-hiking in Utah, Arizona, or the Sierras, you should use Four Season Guides. You won’t be disappointed.”
-
Laura S.
“Four Season Guides is amazing. My friend & I had never been backpacking before and wanted an adventure for her birthday. Dave was incredibly helpful in picking a good trip for us & preparing us. Scott & Bob were the guides for our full group of 7. They were fantastic, I truly cannot day enough good things about them. Very knowledgeable about the area, took excellent care of us & totally made the trip. We had amazing weather & Grand Gulch and all of the ruins were spectacular. Thanks so much for a great trip, I’ll be back with the family for sure!!"
Laura S.
-
Diantha W.Diantha W.
“This was the perfect trip for me to explore the wonders of the Bears Ears area. I had made a few day hike excursions into the area but spending 4 days was a phenomenal trip. We visited some of the best preserved archeological sites I have ever seen. From start to finish, I had a wonderful experience with Four Season Guides (FSG). Dave helped me set the trip up via email. He provided helpful trip planning info, recommendations for what personal gear to bring, etc. The guides were some of the best I have traveled with. They are kind, positive, and patient. If you have never backpacked before, trekking with FSG would be a great way to learn. They set a comfortable pace, made plenty of stops for snacks and water, and provided gourmet backpacking meals. Above and beyond this, they are passionate about the area. They are incredibly knowledgable and it was a treat learning from them. They also demonstrate "Leave No Trace" visiting and are respectful for the environment and archeological sites. At all times, I felt comfortable and safe on the trip. I can't wait to hike with FSG again.”
-
Lindsay G.Lindsay G.
“The Best Way to Explore the Outdoors! I did the Zion, Bryce, and Escalante trip in Utah and it was an absolute blast. I’m someone who loves hiking and camping but doesn’t own the necessary gear and doesn’t feel comfortable enough navigating the wilderness solo, so I was SO happy to find Four Season Guides that takes care of both things. The trip was incredibly well planned and executed, our guide gave us options of different hikes each day and shared his vast experience of what would be a good fit for us (along with prioritizing safety due to weather conditions), and the places we went to were stunning beyond belief. Highly highly recommend doing trips with them!!”
-
Elizabeth B.Elizabeth B.
“We just returned from the Zion, Bryce, Escalante Basecamp trip. It was our third trip with FSG and was again fantastic! We previously had great experiences with the Grand Canyon Rim to Rim and Yosemite Half Dome Trips.
Scott, our guide, was extremely knowledgeable and clearly passionate about the areas where he leads trips. When weather made planned hikes impractical he had amazing alternatives at the ready which in no way felt like disappointments – in fact they proved to be some of our favorites of the trip. He took care of all the details including meals and cleanup. We particularly appreciated the effort to make creative meals including lots of fruits and vegetables. Every day was well planned and Scott took time to get to know the people on our trip and make sure that each day was personalized and a good fit for the group.
FSG provides all the equipment that you need as well as all your meals (and trail snacks). That makes it really easy to show up with just your personal items and have everything that you need. If FSG guides somewhere we want to go, we wouldn’t think of using anyone else. I’d highly recommend them to anyone.”
-
Andrea P.Andrea P.
“This is the second year in a row my friends and I have traveled out west with Four Season Guides. I cannot recommend them enough. This year we did a 5 day basecamp tour and hiked Zion, Bryce Canyon and Escalante with Matt (also amazing) who always had our best interest in mind, was awesome to hang out with and helped us avoid the Memorial Day crowds. My favorite of the three parks was Bryce Canyon—it’s such a magical place.
I actually missed my flight to Saint George and Dave (owner) was so helpful in helping re-direct my travel plans to get me into the Canyon as quick as possible. I arrived with enough time to rest and get ready for the hike out. Everyone on their team is great. These have definitely been some of my favorite trips. I can’t wait until the next.”
-
Deyanne N.Deyanne N.
“Absolutely loved this trip! But it wouldn’t have been nearly as good if not for our guide, Bob. He did everything in his power to make our trip the best. The meals he prepared were incredible; he was extremely helpful with all our needs; the hikes he planned for us were challenging (but not overbearing) and left each of us with a sense of accomplishment. He was able to pick hikes that left no one behind, but still challenged those that could do more. It was incredible. We hiked as a group with no one feeling inadequate. We all left with a huge sense of accomplishment and the sights we saw were breathtaking! Escalante is the best kept secret and my personal favorite. We have used Four Seasons in the past and see no reason to look for another company. This company is the best and we couldn’t have been more pleased with our guide, Bob. He’s the best!”
-
Jessica C.Jessica C.
“This was our second time using Four Season Guides and would use them again and again. We hiked Bryce and Escalante with camping. From start to finish our guide Karne was amazing. Hikes were perfectly planned and all camp meals were amazing. Can’t say enough good things about this company.”
-
Janellen H.Janellen H.
“Bryce Canyon National Park and Grand Escalante Staircase areas are beautiful, especially in October. Great hikes, comfortable campground, and friends = great trip.”
-
Emily P.Emily P.
“We joined Four Season Guides for a wonderful 5-day Utah basecamp hike in Bryce Canyon and Escalante in June 2022. This adventure was safely and expertly led by the dream team of Matt and Owen – from their in-depth knowledge of the area (geology, vegetation, Native American history and presence, and so much more) to the preparation of excellent meals each day, including coffee first thing in the morning.Leading up to the trip, FSG office staff answered our questions in a thorough and timely manner, which was very much appreciated.
“Escalante is incredible! Matt and Owen took us to very special places that they know from their experience and time in this region. If you’re looking to say yes to a guided adventure that is both challenging and rewarding – look no further – go with Four Season Guides. We look forward to the next time – hopefully next year! – that we can go into the wild with Four Season Guides. Many thanks for such an incredible experience. ”
-
Silke W.Silke W.
“We had an amazing and awesome time during the trip this week – all we can say is WOW!!!! The landscapes on the different daytrips were breathtaking and it was so much fun to squeeze ourselves through slot canyons, wade through the river with our water sandals, hike Bryce canyon, see the Escalante waterfall, and explore a bunch of other places. Matt was a great guide and took excellent care of us. And we loved the food, too!”
-
Suzanne S.
“I had been to Zion and Bryce Canyon before. On this guided tour I experienced and learned so much more. The efficiency of a guide who deals with all aspects of travel is well worth it. Our guide Owen was knowledgeable, helpful, polite, efficient, and more. We felt like we were in good hands. It was like traveling with a family member. We are already talking about a trip in 2025 with Four Seasons.”
Suzanne S.
-
Dorothy M.
“My 2 friends and I did a 4-day hiking trip with Four Season Guides that went to Zion and Bryce. I had previously taken a trip with them to Phantom Ranch in the Grand Canyon. Like the Grand Canyon trip, this recent one was a trip of a lifetime. The guide really knew the geology and was a terrific hiking guide and companion. The food was great, too. I can without reservation recommend them highly. I hope to take another trip with them next year. Highlight definitely was seeing California condors in Zion.”
Dorothy M.
-
David S.
“This trip was everything we expected and more! Our guide Owen was extremely capable and knowledgeable educating us in the geology, history, plant and animal life, and more. All of the meals and accommodations were as good or better than expected.
One word of advice to potential hikers- take the training guidelines supplied by Four Seasons Guides seriously! The hiking is strenuous! Meeting the provided guidelines ensures you are able to fully enjoy all of the beauty found in the parks along with the company of your guide and fellow hikers.”
David S.
-
Zuzana N.Zuzana N.
“We loved every minute of our second trip with Four Season Guides (Best of Canyon Country Lodge-Based Tour). The service was exceptional and our guide Karne was amazing. We had a lot of fun and saw beautiful places in Canyon Country. We cannot wait to book another trip with Four Season Guides.”
-
Lindsay G.Lindsay G.
“I did the Best of Canyon Country trip in Utah and it was an absolute blast. The trip was incredibly well planned and executed, our guide gave us options of different hikes each day and shared his vast experience of what would be a good fit for us (along with prioritizing safety due to weather conditions), and the places we went to were stunning beyond belief. Highly recommend doing trips with them!!”
-
Jennifer M.Jennifer M.
“Just got back from our first trip with FSG and it definitely won't be the last! We booked this as a means to cross an item off the bucket list (hiking in Utah), and boy was it the best thing we could have done. The experience itself was like nothing I could have imagined. Our guide, Scott, was truly top notch. He's so incredibly knowledgeable about all things Southwest, from history and ecology, to hidden trails and food :) He really made an effort to get to know us all and come up with hikes that worked for everyone, and conversations that left us both enlightened and entertained.
The hikes themselves were amazing - some had to be changed due to weather but it was hardly even noticeable since Scott picked such amazing alternatives. He also did a great job gauging everyone's hiking abilities so that nothing was too difficult for anyone in the group.
We're already talking about which trip we want to do next, and definitely want to do it with Scott and FSG!”
-
Sharon J. “Our Bryce and Escalante lodge-based hiking was a great trip! Matt’s knowledge and experience allowed him to show us things we never would have found on our own. He tailored the itineraries to the groups interests and abilities so that everyone had an enjoyable trip. I recently went on a tour with a larger guide company, but I really missed the small group size and personal touch provided by Four Season Guides. I highly recommend this company and look forward to hiking with them again next year!”Sharon J.
-
Andrew P.Andrew P.
“This year was our second trip with FSG and it was absolutely perfect. Our guide Drew is a wealth of information and well studied on the geological and cultural aspects of the Americas, and in particular for our trip in the US Southwest. We did a lodge based tour this year and the entire operation was first class. The Inn was fantastic and a must for anyone in the area. The equipment and transportation/vans are all new or in perfect condition. The food on the trail was plentiful and varied. Drew put on some 5 Stars trail lunch spreads at spots with views only those with adventure in their blood can experience. The evening restaurants were far above our expectations, nearly resort gourmet! This annual trip with friends of 40 years is something that we all look forward to and Four Season’s has earned our respect and appreciation! From first contact to final departure, this is a job well done by Four Seasons!”
-
McKenzie T.McKenzie T.
“Our trip absolutely exceeded our expectations. I truly believe there was not a thing that I could suggest to improve the trip. Hiking activities: wonderful – the sights were amazing and appropriate. Owen did a great job of juggling some weather so that all were safe and able to experience sights that we may not have been able to if he wasn’t creative and flexible about the situation. Accommodations: stunning! We were amazed by how cute and comfortable the lodge was. This is truly a hidden gem of Escalante. It was definitely better than being in a hotel! Group: we had a group of diverse ages. There were a few struggles due to age/ability and also bodies adjusting to the elevation. There will always be some form of this in a group of strangers and so to me, it was expected. I am fully aware of this as a potential when signing up for a group experience. Hiking on different terrain, and in a different environment is not an easy task and I feel that the advice on training is very appropriate and should be taken seriously. Guide: I may have some bias because I have been with Owen before in the Grand Canyon, but he is an amazing guide. His experience, leadership, and knowledge of everything around us, is outstanding.
Overall, I came back for a reason. I appreciate everything that is put together for a wonderful experience. I thoroughly enjoyed it, and the trip was worth every moment being able to spend time with my husband who would have difficulty with backpacking trips. Thank you so much again and I can’t wait to see y’all in the future!”
-
Patrick R.Patrick R.
“We booked the Escalante lodge-based tour with Four Seasons with 2 other couples. It was a wonderful trip – perfect weather and a great itinerary covering Bryce and Escalante. The treks were mind-blowing in terms of scenery, and we were thrilled to avoid the crowds at Zion. Matt, our guide, was a wealth of knowledge and bent over backwards to accommodate the group throughout the trip. Lodgings were clean and quite comfortable — we all slept like babies. We will definitely be back for another excursion!”
-
Jim R.Jim R.
“This was our third trip with Four Season Guides and they never disappoint. This year we went to Moab and also for the third time, we had Bob as our guide. From the initial planning stages where Four Seasons is easy to work with and gets back to you promptly, to flawless execution of the planning required for the trip itself, Four Seasons is professional and on the ball. Bob gets to know his hikers and will tailor the hike and make changes on the fly as needed. We would rank Four Seasons with 5 stars for all of our trips and we hope to continue using their services.”
-
William Y.William Y.
“This was a great trip for us 4 older adults who didn’t necessarily want to ‘rough it’ with camping outdoors. We had a great time and a reunion with Bob, our guide, who had already taken us on a 4 day hiking/camping trip the year before to Havasu Falls (in July). The great thing about this type of hike is that we only have to worry about bringing along our own daily water supply. Bob supplies the snack along the way, and provides the lunches. Bob was great in providing information on the geography and some of the history of the area and anecdotes of some of the characters that lived in the area. He was also good in pacing the hikes with appropriate stops and snack breaks for us.
The hikes themselves were spectacular, usually hiking 6-10 miles a day. The country we saw was beautiful. While places like Delicate Arch in Arches are well traveled by many, some of the other hikes were a lot more remote and didn’t encounter too many other hikers. These were hikes that we would not have gone on our own. This was our second outing with FSG (and for some in our party it was the third time out). They are a quality outfit and will use them again, just need to figure out where.”
-
Deyanne N.Deyanne N.
“Our trip to Moab to visit the national parks was just wonderful! Bob was an incredible guide. He took us on some awesome hikes, patched our blisters and answered all our questions, as well as making wonderful meals! We couldn’t have asked for anything more. This is the 4th trip we’ve made with Four Seasons Guides and everyone has been incredible! When you’ve found the best, why look anywhere else! This is a wonderful, knowledgable company! We love them!”
-
-
Check back soon for updates on their experiences exploring with us.
-
-
Kristen K.
“This was a trip of a lifetime for me… As a first-time backpacker, I was a little nervous about setting out for 6 days in the wilderness (on an “Advanced” trek). However, being outfitted – full gear and meals are provided (and prepared) – and led by our awesome guide, Scott, I had no trouble quickly finding peace of mind. I was able to fully enjoy every moment of this amazing experience of hiking through Yosemite – where it felt like every 50 feet brought something breathtaking, exciting, new, and/or unreal. YOU TRULY HAVE TO BE IMMERSED IN IT TO BELIEVE IT…I’m still trying to process it all – two weeks later. I would say that the best advice FSG provided was that proper TRAINING PRIOR TO YOUR TRIP IS CRUCIAL. Take this seriously and you will have no regrets.”
Kristen K.
-
Christiane R.
“The Red Peak Pass Loop is a challenging, but super rewarding back packing trip. Our group was small, as is common with Four Season Guides. 5 of us plus our guide Scott, who is amazing. Our group started the trip on one of the most busy days in the park (Labor Day). Scott got us out of the the “tourist overrun” section quickly so we could enjoy the beauty and quiet back country. This trip is physically challenging, but absolutely worth it. There was great flexibility as to where to camp for the night, and Scott was great about picking the best spots for us. Meals were delicious and creative. We had a great time and definitely will go on future trips with Four Season Guides.”
Christiane R.
-
Debbie M.
“The Best Trip Ever, according to my family. This was our fourth backpacking trip with Four Season Guides and our third having Scott as our guide. Two of our trips have been into the Grand Canyon and one to Canyonlands, Utah. But hands down nothing beats the scenery and beauty of Yosemite. Those six days hiking with Scott were amazing and challenging all at once. Scott kept everyone very pumped up letting us know we were up to the challenge, even when I seriously started to doubt myself. The routes and campsites he showed us took our breaths away at times. We are two weeks back home and all of us just want to be back in the high sierra of Yosemite with the beautiful waterfalls and running streams with Scott waking us up with coffee and making us great meals! Four Season Guides seems to know exactly what adventure our family needs and goes out of their way to make sure we get it! I always knew the guides from Four Season Guides were first class, but after observing guides from other outfits while we were there, there is no doubt in my mind they are definitely the very best!! We can’t wait for our next adventure with Four Season Guides and Scott next year.”
Debbie M.
-
Victoria C.Victoria C.
“Incredible 4th of July Yosemite Trip with FSG! This was my second time on a backpacking trip with Four Seasons (second time in three months if that tells you anything about how much I’ve enjoyed both). Yosemite is without a doubt one of the most incredible places I’ve ever visited. We had the pleasure of climbing to Clouds Rest and up Half Dome and as a group decided there was no better way to spend the 4th of July Holiday!
Matt, our tour guide, was awesome! He expertly led us through the back country, prepared delicious food for us, and was instrumental in helping our whole group get through some more strenuous portions of the trip. I personally was very excited about climbing Half Dome, but realized once I was at the cables that I was far more afraid of heights than I think I ever realized. Both Matt and the other members on my trip were so incredibly supportive and patient that we all made it to the top together–true praise for both Four Season’s incredible guides and clients alike.
Four Season Guides provides excellent equipment, food, and guidance both before and during the trip–all of which I appreciate as it allows me to train for the trip (do not skip this step, training is critical) at home, but show up and have most everything taken care of once at the park. I cannot recommend FSG enough and am very much looking forward to joining them again!”
-
Drew P.
“Took my 2 daughters (ages 19 and 27) on 4 day Yosemite trip with a total group size of 6 including the guide. Dave from Four Seasons coordinated everything including equipment and meals. Our guide, Matt, was awesome. Climbed Half Dome and experienced a bunch of other stuff. Be sure to follow Dave’s recommendations regarding fitness, etc.”
Drew P.
-
Cathy J.
“This is our third trip with Four Season Guides and they all have been excellent. The equipment is top quality as are the guides. This company is a little smaller than some of the other guide companies and it allows them to provide more top notch customer service. Their staff will answer all your questions (no matter how many times you call). Yosemite and Half Dome were amazing. You will not regret taking this trip.”
Cathy J.
-
Tonya S.
“I just returned from the absolute best 4 day Yosemite backpacking trip with my friends! We hiked while carrying 35lb backpacks, tent camped, and climbed the half–dome! All of these activities were led by Four Seasons Guides and I cannot say enough great things about them! Jeremy was a very experienced hiker, guide, and had an extremely fun personality. The equipment provided by Four Season was top notch and Jeremy was extremely helpful to make sure we were all comfortable with our equipment and our abilities along the way. I would highly recommend Four Season Guides for any trip, I know I will be using them for any of my future trips.”
Tonya S.
-
Axel H.
“This was our second trip with Four Season Guides. Again it was extraordinary. The trips are well planned, the equipment that is provided is great and the food was fantastic. Matt was our guide again and he did an outstanding job making this trip a great experience. Though this trip was physically more demanding than out last trip in Utah, Matt found the right pace to suit everybody in the group. He got us on the top of Half Dome early in the morning giving us a few minutes to enjoy the fantastic view all by ourselves before the next people arrived. Matt knows his stuff but more importantly he is just a great guy to spend time in the outdoors with. We loved every single moment of the trip and will be back again. Dave, thank you for the great support and fast responses from the office.”
Axel H.
-
Dan S.Dan S.
“Our group recently completed the 5 day Merced River/Half Dome trip and we absolutely loved it. Four Seasons Guides had everything so well planned/communicated every step of the way with no surprises. The equipment, food and guide were outstanding. All we had to do is show up and be prepared to handle the rigor of a 40 lb. pack for 5 – 7 miles per day on steep inclines. Our guide, Bob, was fabulous with his meal selections, familiarity with the best sites and sharing his experiences and rich history of Yosemite. This was a very memorable trip and can’t wait to schedule another trip.”
-
Kurt M.Kurt M.
“Five day Merced Loop in Yosemite. We had a great time and Matt is an excellent guide. The route was spectacular, the food was great and the equipment was all top notch.”
-
Chris G.Chris G.
“This was my 7th backpacking trip with FSG and like all the rest, it was outstanding. Our guide Matt, who I’ve hiked with twice before, is fun, caring, professional and very passionate about his job and tightly integrated lifestyle. If you’re looking for a guided backpacking experience in the western US, don’t look any further than Four Seasons Guides.”
-
Mike E.Mike E.
“My son and I were looking for a guide for a Yosemite hike and were lucky enough to find the VERY BEST! Four Seasons is very professional, always prompt, and pays attention to all the details. Dave made sure that we were prepared with all the information we needed for our loop trip up the Merced river and a summit up half dome.
Our guide Matt could not have been more knowledgeable and accommodating. His familiarity of the area and his stories were excellent. His cooking and meals were so good, they rivaled restaurants and I will gladly try some of his recipes at home. I have never had such fresh and delicious food on a 5 day back country hike.
At 54 years old, I have had a lot of experience from my days as an Eagle scout and even leading some group hikes over the years. So when I tell you that this company knows their stuff, believe it. We picked the right company for sure. Four Season Guides is fantastic. You will be impressed!”
-
Jennifer W.
“While I thought nothing could top the experience I had with the Four Season Guide led rim to rim at the Grand Canyon, the Vogelsang hike at Yosemite was just as fantastic. This was my first trip to Yosemite and it did not disappoint…while FSG took care of the logistics, the gear and the food, this left me with plenty of time to soak in all of the views and enjoy the experience. As with my previous FSG hike, the guide elevated the overall experience. Bob provided park history and information on the abundant flora & fauna…and once again, all of the food he cooked was plentiful and delicious.
I am looking forward to my next adventure with FSG…as soon as I narrow down which trip!”
Jennifer W.
-
Amanda G.
“My first trip with Four Seasons was in the Grand Canyon and it was such a positive one I knew I would be using them again. This time I completed a 5-day backpacking trip in Yosemite. Whether you're interested in joining a group of strangers or getting friends together it's going to be an incredible experience. Already thinking about the next hike I want to take with them.”
Amanda G.
-
Mark S.
“Yosemite National Park!! This is my second trip with Four Seasons Guides and I chose Four Seasons for my hike at Yosemite because of the level of service and expectation of another great trip-they did not disappoint. For those of you wanting to experience a great adventure and leave the planning-permitting details to someone else, I cannot recommend enough using Four Seasons Guides!
Four Seasons will help you determine the trip that is right for you and your party. Reviewing things like destination, level of difficulty and timing during the year for your trip. Once you settle on a trip everything from preparation to planning is laid out for you. Four Seasons does an exceptional job of laying out an itinerary and meeting the expectation of that itinerary. Their guides are friendly, knowledgeable and do everything to make sure you have a safe & amazing trip. Our guide Jeremy was no exception; providing amazing trail meals, sharing backcountry knowledge and engaging in great conversation!
If you are looking for a Premier Guide Service to experience your next Adventure, look no further than Four Seasons Guides!”
Mark S.
-
Jen W.Jen W.
“While I thought nothing could top the experience I had with the Four Season Guide led rim to rim at the Grand Canyon, the Vogelsang to Half Dome hike at Yosemite was just as fantastic. As with the previous hike I went on with FSG, the pre-trip planning with Dave was easy and he provided all the information needed in or order to get to the park, properly train and pack for the adventure. This was my first trip to Yosemite and it did not disappoint…while FSG took care of the logistics, the gear and the food, this left me with plenty of time to soak in all of the views and enjoy the experience. As with my previous FSG hike, the FSG guide elevated the overall experience. Bob provided park history and information on the abundant flora & fauna…and once again, all of the food he cooked was plentiful and delicious.
I am looking forward to my next adventure with FSG…as soon as I narrow down which trip!”
-
Dave F.Dave F.
“We completed the 5-dat Vogelsang/Half Dome Trip in Yosemite. It was my second trip with Four Season Guides and with our guide Bob, having done a 5-day trip in the Grand Canyon last year. The trip was fantastic. This route is excellent and highly recommended. You start in the High Sierra's seeing alpine lakes, meadows, and snow patches from last winter. Then you work your way down by beautiful Merced Lake, then forward to climb iconic Half Dome.
I can't imagine how a guide could be more professional, more fun, and more informative than Bob. The equipment they provide is high quality and the food was outstanding. I highly recommend Four Season Guides and this trip in particular to put on your bucket list.”
-
Christopher A.
“My friends and I have taken two trips with Four Season Guides which have been tremendous successes. In 2022, we did a Grand Canyon hike, and in 2023, we backpacked through Yosemite. FSG takes care of the permits, the gear and solicits input on food/dietary needs as well as the hiking specifics. The result is a highly personalized trip to some of the most beautiful places on earth. The guides have been excellent; they are knowledgeable, attentive, helpful, and good cooks. While the trips aren’t “easy,” and FSG is adamant that you must train for the physical work, the company does everything possible to handle the logistics. They go out of their way to ensure we have an excellent experience.
I look forward to our next trip with them. Truly awesome and memorable experiences.”
Christopher A.
-
John S.John S.
“My son and I went on the hike in early August with Bob from Four Seasons and three other hikers. Bob was excellent in building a team and instructing. I was the “old man” (58) on the trip so the first day up 3000 feet was a challenge but after making camp and relaxing by the stream we were rejuvenated. Three days in the high country were awesome with hikes to El Capitan, Yosemite Point, North Dome and others. Good meals, snacks, and attention to hydration left me stronger at the end. Having four new friends and a wonderful experience with my son left me fulfilled and in even greater awe of our world.”
-
Sherrie H.Sherrie H.
“If it doesn’t challenge you, it doesn’t change you. That is my motto. When I am looking for an outdoor adventure for me (normal person), I want something different and something that will make me say “Wow, I just did that!’. But at age 56, I want to be safe too, so I look to Four Season Guides to help me. This is my third trip with this company which speaks to how comfortable I am with them on these adventures. I have also included my daughter and my friends’ young adults in these trips. We have all loved them.
Yosemite is a beautiful national park with alot to offer. If you are considering at trip and want a company to help you, I have a couple of suggestions: 1) Pick a guide company with good reviews. 2) Don’t go with want everyone else does. Half Dome is an example…so many people want to score a permit to hike up it, but I am not sure why…when we were at the top of Yosemite Falls, stepped on El Capitan, North Dome, Indian Peak, and slept by Snow Creek. It was hard at times, but I trained and was ready for the adventure as advised by Dave. It was a great trip for this flat-lander from Maryland. Thank you to Jeremy (our guide) and to Dave (owner) for a great trip!”
-
Nicole B.Nicole B.
“This was my third time with Four Seasons which says it all. They will tailor your experience to exactly what you are looking for, match any dietary restrictions or requests and the equipment they use is always clean. Jeremy was an amazing guide and cooked great food. Any questions we had leading up to the trip were answered quickly and very helpful. I will definitely be coming back.”
-
Jodi W.
“We had a fantastic girls backpacking trip with Matt! He was patient with us (many of us first time backpackers) and tolerated all of our girl talk! Yosemite was gorgeous and it was an all-around fantastic experience. Highly recommend for experienced or first-time backpackers.”
Jodi W.
-
Linda G.Linda G.
“This was my first foray into backpacking and trip to Yosemite with FSG was perfect! Our guide was patient, good humored and most importantly super experienced so we learned a lot while having a good time. I enjoyed the detail to my diet request and even learned a few new recipes! Our group is discussing a trip for next year!”
-
Kristen K.
“This was a trip of a lifetime for me. As a first-time backpacker, I was a little nervous about setting out for 4 days in the wilderness. However, being outfitted - full gear and meals are provided (and prepared) - and led by our awesome guide, Scott, I had no trouble quickly finding peace of mind. I was able to fully enjoy every moment of this amazing experience of hiking through Yosemite - where it felt like every 50 feet brought something breathtaking, exciting, new, and/or unreal. YOU TRULY HAVE TO BE IMMERSED IN IT TO BELIEVE IT. I'm still trying to process it all - two weeks later.”
Kristen K.
-
Cathy L.
“This is our third trip with Four Season Guides and they all have been excellent. The equipment is top quality, as are the guides. This company is a little smaller than some of the other guide companies and it allows them to provide more top-notch customer service. Their staff will answer all your questions (no matter how many times you call).
Yosemite was amazing. You will not regret taking this trip!”
Cathy L.
-
Tony H.
“This trip was amazing, much like our previous 8 trips with FSG. We loved that although we had a plan, we pivoted a few times and still saw spectacular sights and sounds. The scenery was as epic as it gets! The pinnacle was getting to Iceberg Lake. The water was so clear and the colors were so deep and vibrant. Our guide, Jeremy, was his usual pro's pro on the service front and culinary side. Can't say enough good things.”
Tony H.
-
Larry S.Larry S.
“Our guided Wilson Mountain hike was spectacular! The views are a definite reward for the effort and it definitely required effort. The uphill was slow-going but steady, and our guide set a manageable pace that didn’t wear us out prematurely. We enjoyed a delicious lunch at the summit complete with sandwiches, fresh fruit, and tasty treats. And we didn’t see another person until we were on our way back down. All in all, an excellent day. Scott was an exceptional guide: kind, informative, organized, and very experienced. We look forward to returning for a multi-day trip in the future.”
-
Sarah S.
“What a day...what a hike! The Mitten Ridge loop featured non-stop breathtaking scenery, exciting hiking, and an amazing guide! Brian was a wealth of information, great storyteller, trail-side chef, comedian, and just an all-around great person. He knew exactly how to pace the group, kept a close eye on everyone, helped when needed, and provided encouragement. The surprise frozen Gatorades were a special treat when the temperatures got hot! Couldn’t have asked for a better experience...or a better workout!”
Sarah S.
-
Walter H.
“Sedona is such a beautiful place and our hike with Bob on the Mescal Trail was the perfect way to really immersive ourselves in the surroundings. This was great hike for our family, who are relatively fit but not avid hikers. The terrain was gentle but fun and the views were amazing. Bob was so great with our kids and kept them engaged with his jokes and stories. He was also extremely informative...a walking encyclopedia. Everything was perfect. We definitely caught the hiking bug and want to come back for a longer hiking trip next time.”
Walter H.
-
Angel P.
“Bear Mountain is not for the weak and is not a stroll in the wilderness. I told Dave (the owner) what I was looking for and he suggested Bear Mountain. The hike was along red rocky paths with incredible views of Sedona at every turn. Bear Mountain and our very knowledgeable and pleasant tour guide, Karne, proved to be exactly what we were looking for! With very few other hikers on the path and amazing sun exposures over the rocks, it was a welcomed challenge and incredible experience for us. I would definitely hike with Four Seasons Guides again and recommend them to anyone looking for a great experience in Sedona!!!”
Angel P.
-
-
Check back soon for updates on their experiences exploring with us.
-
-
Alan P.
“Our Canyonlands trip was one we won’t soon forget. The Needles District is a hiker’s paradise and everyday was filled with unbelievable scenery. Druid Arch, Peekaboo, Chesler Park...all simply amazing. And the campsite was awesome! We felt like we had the place to ourselves. Our guide was as incredible as well: patient, attentive, fun, informative, and a great chef. He knew exactly when we needed him and precisely when to sit back and let us push our limits on our own. I can’t think of a better way to spend 4 days hiking and camping. FSG has this stuff down perfectly!”
Alan P.
-
-
Check back soon for updates on their experiences exploring with us.
-
-
Carol D.Carol D.
“This was my first time using a guided tour company and I am so impressed! It was an amazing experience with our guide Owen. He is passionate about the Grand Canyon and shared with us the history, geology, flora and fauna – I learned so much. This is the best way to see the Grand Canyon – you’ll be safe, informed, and well fed. Owen showed us the best places to take photos and pointed out so many things I would have missed on my own. He knew where all the best views were, away from the crowds. The Grand Canyon is an amazing place to visit, but a guided hike adds so much more to the experience. Four Season Guides – and Owen – made this a trip I’ll never forget!”
-
Tony V.
“My friend and I had the pleasure of going on a guided tour with Karne. I can say without any hesitation that is was the best decision we made during the entire trip. Karne was extremely knowledgeable and transformed a day hike into a once-in-a-lifetime experience. She was extremely engaged the entire time and provided invaluable commentary on everything we saw. If you want to make take your visit to the Grand Canyon to the next level, book a trip with Four Season Guides. Be sure to talk to them on what you are comfortable with on a physical level and what you're hoping to see. They will craft a unique experience tailored to your needs. The reward will 100% be worth it."
Tony V.
-
Pierre L.
“We had a great day hike, our guide Steve was knowledgeable and pleasant. I strongly recommend using them to enhance your hiking experience.”
Pierre L.
-
Jennifer S.
“We had a great time exploring Death Valley with Four Season Guides. Bri was energetic, fun, explorative, strong and SO capable. The meals at the lodge/inn were fantastic and the hotel was lovely. I'd definitely recommend this trip to anyone looking for an otherworldly landscape to explore and I'd recommend Bri to anyone anytime!”
Jennifer S.
-
Gemma F.
“My 8th time with FSG and this was the best trip!!!! The Kanab Creek area exceeded expectations. You did not over sell the area or the experience. The campsites were awesome as well. The third night on the slickrock I did not use a rainfly and the sky was spectacular.
Bob was a terrific guide, as always. The trails were a delight, the little side excursions, the cowboy artifacts were an added bonus.
The only thing missing was a fourth night.”
Gemma F.
-
Jennifer S.
“We had a great time exploring Death Valley with Four Season Guides. Bri was energetic, fun, explorative, strong and SO capable. The meals at the lodge/inn were fantastic and the hotel was lovely. I'd definitely recommend this trip to anyone looking for an otherworldly landscape to explore and I'd recommend Bri to anyone anytime!”
Jennifer S.
-
Check back soon for updates.
-
Check back soon for updates.
-
Check back soon for updates.
-
Check back soon for updates.
-
Check back soon for updates.
-
Check back soon for updates.
-
Check back soon for updates.
-
Check back soon for updates.
-
Check back soon for updates.
Price:
Single Supplement:
01
Top-Ranked Tour Company
Don’t take our word for it. More than a thousand 5-Star reviews on TripAdvisor will attest to the quality of our adventures.
Exceptional Guides
03
Our guiding staff consists primarily of seasoned veterans who have been guiding professionally, full-time, for a decade or more. In addition to their extensive experience, our guides are fun, accommodating, approachable, entertaining, polite and just plain good people.
All-Inclusive Tours
04
We’re at work, you’re on vacation! We take care of all the logistics associated with a backcountry adventure and handling all the dirty work. Gear, food, permits, transportation…we have you covered and it’s all included.
Local Experts
02
The Southwestern U.S. is our home and our passion. We’ve been exploring this region for decades and know it intimately. This is our niche and nobody does it better.
Four Season Guides
Why Travel With Fsg
